JP7231184B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a character effect may be performed to display a predetermined character that suggests development to a predetermined effect ,
In the character presentation, decorative patterns are stopped to form a ready-to-win state, and the decorative patterns forming the ready-to-win state and specific decorative patterns capable of forming a jackpot pattern array move at a first degree of transparency, and the ready-to-win state is formed. When a specific decorative design moves on the reach line in the state, the specific decorative design is displayed with a second transparency higher than the first transparency, and the specific decorative design is displayed at the second transparency. By displaying with a transparency of 2, the entire predetermined character, part of which is arranged behind the specific decorative pattern, is displayed so as to be visible,
The predetermined effect is performed by displaying the predetermined character in the character effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design variation production|presentation D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design target production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design target production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design target production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design target production|presentation D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-symbol superimposition production|presentation A at the time of reaching. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative-symbol superimposition production|presentation B at the time of reaching. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-symbol superimposition production|presentation C at the time of reaching. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-symbol superimposition production|presentation D at the time of reaching. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect C; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect D; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot pattern arrangement|sequence display production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot pattern arrangement|sequence display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot pattern arrangement|sequence display production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot pattern arrangement|sequence display production|presentation D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design jackpot suggestion production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design jackpot suggestion production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design jackpot suggestion production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design jackpot suggestion production|presentation D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design superimposition production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design superimposition production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design superimposition production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design superimposition production|presentation D. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect|action A. It is a figure for demonstrating the big-hit background display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect|action C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multi-timer effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multiple timer effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multiple timer effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multi-timer effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer speed effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer speed effect B; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a timer speed effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer speed effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect B; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect C; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a timer count effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory timer effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory timer effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory timer effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory timer effect D; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect A; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect|presentation A during fluctuation|variation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a during-variation effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a during-variation effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a during-variation effect D; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a character display effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character display effect C; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a character display effect D; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a repetitive chan suggestion effect A on hold; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a continuous chan suggestion effect B on hold; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a repetitive chan suggestion effect C on hold; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a repetitive chan suggestion effect D on hold; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an error display effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an error display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an error display effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an error display effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined information display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined information display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined information display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined information display effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon movement effect A; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon movement effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon movement effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a suspended icon movement effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon superimposition effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon superimposition effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon superimposition effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending icon superimposition effect D; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a pending display pattern 1 and a pending display pattern 2 of the pending special display effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a pending display pattern 3 and a pending display pattern 4 of the pending special display effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a pending display pattern 5 and a pending display pattern 6 of the pending special display effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a pending display pattern 7 and a pending display pattern 8 of the pending special display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect D; It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation A during probability variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation B during probability variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation C during probability variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation D during probability variation. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect B; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect C; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a battle effect D; FIG.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a sword member 64 , a sword button 65 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a frame movable body 600 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the hilt of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. be. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs light emission effects during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 . The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a retracted state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it protrudes upward from the front frame 53 .

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning slot 27 (ordinary winning slot 27), and a general winning An opening 29 (ordinary winning opening 29), an out opening 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper part of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 .

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A has a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B has a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 include a first production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), a production pattern (decorative pattern) 8L, A second effect symbol display area in which other decorative symbols different from 8C and 8R are variably displayed, a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a pending digested image display in which a pending digested image 9C is displayed. and a region. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9C. The first pending icon and the second pending icon are collectively referred to simply as pending icons.

The first performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

Also, the second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) (not shown) is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) (not shown) is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right performance pattern (right decorative pattern) (not shown) is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance designs displayed in the second performance design display area are the same designs as the performance designs 8L, 8C and 8R displayed in the first performance design display area, and are smaller than the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R. Is displayed.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screens 7a and 7b, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect, a big win effect performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like. . In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) that is currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and the display of the suspended digested image 9C allows the first special figure pending or the first 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("digestion of special figure suspension" described later).

Below the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-like member can move up and down. The first movable accessory 14 normally rests at the retracted position (FIG. 1) below the display device 7, moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, and stops at the advanced position (FIG. 16). be able to. The first movable accessory 14 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 . A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. - 特許庁A stage portion 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which game balls flow in and an exit part from which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

The normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``lottery of normal symbols'' means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning to the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of the operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". In addition, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize winning port 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. In the case of a failure, a failure pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not stopped (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means to determine the normal pattern random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation, and execute the variable display of the normal pattern to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the V area. A sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning hole sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning hole 29 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the production as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . etc. is output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107 to control them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7 . The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 . The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of each of the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15, and controls the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15 according to the motion pattern data. 2 Control the operation of the movable accessory 15 . Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

An effect button detection switch 63 a and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the motion of the frame movable body 600 according to the motion pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed down, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when a human body touches it, and the like. may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Probability variation production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. ``Random number for look-ahead effect'' is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect at the time of variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (any one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special pattern (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, open It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second for 1 time at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" when "15H" or "22H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, the special figure stop symbol data 11H to 14H, 21H jackpots correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates the Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage expected jackpot" includes "16RV expected passage jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). That is, the game state after "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high probability short time state (high probability high base state ), but with a high probability, it becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state", and the state in which the probability variation is not controlled is simply "normal probability state ( non-high-probability state, low-probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". Also, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) is referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to win the game ball to the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a reserved ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the normal symbol random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number value in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special Figure 2 big hit determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 big hit determination process (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big-hit determination is performed (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to make the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") among the big hit determination tables T1 determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P4" to "P6") of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set to the time saving counter if it is a low probability high base state, and "160" is set to the time saving counter if it is a high probability high base state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time-saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round specifying command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the processing is finished.

In the above step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and terminate this processing.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "10000" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "160" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times, or the next jackpot is won.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost reached before 10,000 jackpot lotteries are performed in the high-probability base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the big hit in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the big hit scheduled to pass V (special stop symbol data 21H) is during the big hit game If V is passed, the gaming state after the big win is almost guaranteed to be a high-probability-high base state until the next big win.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number value may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the variation effect (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the game state information included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and when the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead rendering pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combinations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, even if the pre-variation ending command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect of fading the notice image is performed. Do. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation of Movable Board (First Movable Accessory 14 and Second Movable Accessory 15) Operation of the movable board (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like.

The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-like member can move up and down, and can rest at a retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is visible to the player. By moving (advancing) upward from the state of FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can move to an advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 2 modes). In this second mode, part of the image display device 7 is covered. Further, the first movable accessory 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) downward from the state of FIG. 46, and can stand still there. The first movable accessory 14 is configured to increase the area covering the display screen 7a when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode.

The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body with a face drawn on it. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a portion of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. The rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 advances downward from the state shown in FIG. 1, and in front of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 47, a rotating effect can be performed (second mode).

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect examples, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

The decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. FIG. This decorative design variation effect can be executed during the decorative design variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation performance is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern variation effect A]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. FIG. In the decorative design variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 48(A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, their positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 48(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. is also located above. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed at the same position in the vertical direction. The pending icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

At the start of the decorative design variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the left decorative design 8L moves upward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C moves upward. The left decorative pattern 8L, which has been moving upward, slows down in upward movement speed as if gravity acts downward, turns back above the display screen 7a, and starts downward movement. Next, as shown in FIG. 48(D), the right decorative pattern 8R moves upward. The upward moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has been moving upward is reduced as if gravity is acting downward, and the upward movement is started by folding back above the display screen 7a. The downward moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L that has been moving downward increases. Next, as shown in FIG. 48(E), the upward moving speed of the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been moving upward, slows down as if gravity were acting downward, and the display screen 7a is displayed. Turn upwards and start moving downwards. The moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C moving downward increases.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48(F) and 48(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R increase in downward moving speed in order, The numbers become invisible. FIG. 48(G) shows a mode in which the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving direction of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R when changing is the same as the direction in which the reserved icons 9A are arranged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(H), the variably displayed left decorative design 8L disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48(I), the variably displayed middle decorative design 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48(J), the variably displayed right decorative pattern 8R disappears from the display screen 7a, and all the variably displayed decorative patterns become invisible.

[Decorative pattern variation effect B]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 49(A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed. The mode of stop display is the same as that of the decorative symbol variation effect A in FIG. 48(A). Next, the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 49(B) is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect A shown in FIG. 48(G). That is, FIGS. 48(A) to (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the stop display of FIG. 49(A) and the variation display of FIG. 49(B). Next, the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 49(C) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as that of the decorative symbol variation effect A in FIG. 48(J). That is, FIGS. 48(G) to (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the variable display of FIG. 49(B) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 49(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(D), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R which are variably displayed are displayed. The moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decreases, and the numbers gradually become visible as shown in FIG. 49(E). Next, as shown in 49(F), a right/left symbol reverse direction movement effect is executed. Specifically, while the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, the right decorative pattern 8R starts to move upward (in the opposite direction). Then, as shown in FIG. 49(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may have different vertical positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 49(H), the middle decorative design 8C that is variably displayed is displayed between the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are stopped and displayed. The moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C in the downward direction decreases, and the numbers gradually become visible as shown in FIG. 49(I). Then, all symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 49(J).

[Decorative pattern variation effect C]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 50(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as the decorative symbol variation effect A shown in FIG. 48(G). That is, before the variable display of FIG. 50(A), FIGS. 48(A) to (G) of the decorative symbol variable effect A may be executed. Next, the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 50(B) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as that of the decorative symbol variation effect A in FIG. 48(J). That is, FIGS. 48(G) to 48(J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the variable display of FIG. 50(A) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 50(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the left decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, as the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L decreases, it becomes gradually visible that the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the upper side to the lower side on a curved trajectory that curves to the left. More specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L appears from the upper left of the display screen 7a, draws an arc toward the vicinity of the center, and draws an arc toward the lower left of the display screen 7a. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the left decorative pattern 8L gradually becomes larger as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the right decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, as the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R decreases, it gradually becomes visible as it moves from the upper side to the lower side on a curved trajectory that curves to the right. More specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a, draws an arc toward the vicinity of the center, and draws an arc toward the lower right of the display screen 7a. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved trajectory to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the right decorative pattern 8R gradually becomes larger as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(E), a middle decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in the reach state, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves from above to below on a straight track while the moving speed decreases. gradually become visible. At this time, the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C gradually becomes larger as it moves. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes difficult to see again. Next, as shown in FIG. 50(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed by horizontally rotating three-dimensional figures. Next, as shown in FIG. 50(H), a special ready-to-win effect is executed. Any production can be performed as the contents of the special reach production. Here, as an example, a battle production is performed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. When defeated in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 50(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the three-dimensional figures rotated horizontally, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with the left decorative pattern 8L. and numbers different from the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(J), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed.

[Decorative pattern variation effect D]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. FIG. The decorative symbol variation effect D differs from the decorative symbol variation effect A of FIG. 48 in the direction in which the decorative symbols are arranged and the direction of variation. In the decorative design variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the upper decorative design 8R, the middle decorative design 8C, and the lower decorative design 8L are stopped and displayed. When the upper decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the lower decorative pattern 8L are stopped and displayed, their positions in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 51(A), the upper decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same position in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative pattern 8L is the upper decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C. It is located to the left of The upper decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the lower decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed in the same horizontal position. The pending icons 9A are displayed side by side along the horizontal direction at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

At the start of the decorative design variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 51(B), the upper decorative design 8R moves rightward. Next, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C moves rightward. The upper decorative pattern 8R moving rightward slows down as if it is drawn leftward, turns back on the right side of the display screen 7a, and starts moving leftward. Next, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the lower decorative pattern 8L moves rightward. The middle decorative pattern 8C moving rightward slows down as if it is drawn leftward, turns back on the right side of the display screen 7a, and starts moving leftward. The leftward movement speed of the upper decorative pattern 8R moving leftward is increased. Next, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the rightward movement speed of the lower decorative pattern 8L, which had been moving to the right, slows down as if it is attracted to the left, and on the right side of the display screen 7a Turn around and start moving left. The leftward moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C moving leftward is increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 51(F) and 51(G), the upper decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the lower decorative pattern 8L increase in leftward moving speed in order. The numbers become invisible. FIG. 51(G) shows a mode in which the upper decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the lower decorative pattern 8L are variably displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving direction of the upper decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the lower decorative pattern 8L when changing is the same as the direction in which the reserved icons 9A are arranged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the variably displayed upper decorative design 8R disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative design 8C and the lower decorative design 8L are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51(I), the variably displayed middle decorative design 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative design 8L is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the variably displayed lower decorative pattern 8L disappears from the display screen 7a, and all the variably displayed decorative patterns become invisible.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the first effect (FIG. 48 (A)), and after the first effect, a second effect (FIG. 48(G)) in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed; After the effect of , the left decorative pattern 8L variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed (Fig. 48(H)); After the third effect, a fourth effect (FIG. 48(I)) in which the variably displayed middle decorative design 8C disappears from the display screen 7a and the right decorative design 8R is variably displayed can be executed. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48(B) to 48(F), the variable display in the second effect includes the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At the start of the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move upward in order and then move downward in order. do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A, in the stop display in the first effect, one of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The position of the decorative pattern in the vertical direction is different from the positions of the other two decorative patterns. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect, a plurality of pending icons are arranged along the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48(I) and (J), after the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the variably displayed right decorative pattern 8R disappears from the display screen 7a; As shown in FIGS. 49(C) and (D), after the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed again, and a sixth effect shown in FIG. 49(F). Thus, after the sixth effect, it is possible to execute a seventh effect in which the right decorative pattern 8R moves upward while the left decorative pattern 8L is moving downward. ing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49(H), after the seventh effect, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed again while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute the eighth effect in which is variably displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48(I), (J), and FIG. 50(B), after the fourth effect, the variably displayed right decorative pattern 8R disappears from the display screen 7a. a fifth effect, as shown in FIG. 50(C), after the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed moving along an arc-curved trajectory; As shown in FIG. 50(D), after the sixth effect, a seventh effect is displayed in which the right decorative pattern 8R moves along an arc-curved trajectory, and FIG. As shown, after the seventh effect, the eighth effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C moving along the vertical direction is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, in the sixth effect, the image of the left decorative pattern 8L increases as it moves, and in the seventh effect, the image of the right decorative pattern 8R moves as it moves. In the seventh effect, the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes larger as it moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative symbol variation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
48(B) to 48(D), the timing at which the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R start to move upward can be set arbitrarily. The interval at which each starts moving may be, for example, a 1-second interval or a 0.01-second interval. The same applies to FIGS. 51(B) to 51(D).

[Modification 2]
48(H) to 48(J), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are variably displayed, disappear from the display screen 7a can be arbitrarily set. The interval at which each disappears may be, for example, a 1-second interval or a 0.01-second interval. The same applies to FIGS. 51(H) to 51(J).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative design,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern,
one of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are variably displayed;
a third effect in which, after the second effect, the variably displayed first decorative design disappears from the display means, and the second decorative design and the third decorative design are variably displayed;
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the variably displayed second decorative pattern disappears from the display means and the third decorative pattern is variably displayed can be executed. Amusement machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the variable display in the second effect, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern move along the first direction, and At the start of the variable display, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern move in order toward one side in the first direction, and then move to the first side in order. A gaming machine characterized by moving toward the other side of the direction.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the stop display in the first effect, one of the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design is positioned in the first direction. is different from the positions of the other two decorative patterns.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2 or aspect A1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
A gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, a plurality of the pending icons are arranged along the first direction.
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-2 to A1-4,
a fifth effect, after the fourth effect, in which the variably displayed third decorative pattern disappears from the display means;
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are variably displayed again;
After the sixth effect, the third decorative design moves toward the other side in the first direction while the first decorative design moves toward the other side in the first direction. A gaming machine capable of executing a seventh effect of moving toward.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-5,
After the seventh effect, it is possible to execute an eighth effect in which the second decorative pattern is variably displayed again while the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-2 to A1-4,
a fifth effect, after the fourth effect, in which the variably displayed third decorative pattern disappears from the display means;
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative pattern that moves along an arc-curved trajectory is displayed;
After the sixth effect, a seventh effect in which the third decorative pattern that moves along an arc-curved trajectory is displayed;
After the seventh effect, an eighth effect in which the second decorative pattern that moves along the first direction is displayed can be executed.
◇[Aspect A1-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-7,
In the sixth production, the image of the first decorative pattern becomes larger as it moves,
In the seventh effect, the image of the third decorative pattern becomes larger as it moves,
In the seventh effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the image of the second decorative pattern becomes larger as it moves.

The decorative pattern target effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. FIG. This decorative symbol target effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative pattern target effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern target effect A]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect A. FIG.
In the decorative symbol target effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in the area where the decorative pattern 8L has changed. This target area A21 is associated with the decorative pattern 8L, represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target for stopping the decorative pattern, as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative pattern 8L is set on the reach line LAA. Also, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed within the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that the decorative pattern 8L is being variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. The other decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variably displayed in the same manner as during the variable start effect. Further, hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect A, the effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative design stop effect, the decorative design 8L is stop-displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative designs 8C and 8R are stop-displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a "6" pattern on the reach line LAA, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stop-displayed as a "7" pattern on the reach line LAB. In the target area A21, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, so the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the teammate character CRA and a chance-up image A22 including characters representing "Super hot" are displayed, and the teammate character CRA is shown shouting "Super hot". “Extremely hot” represented by the chance-up image A22 suggests that the expectation of a big win is very high.
It should be noted that other effects may be performed instead of this chance-up effect. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable character effect, etc. may be performed. The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that is executed at the start of the variable change or during the ready-to-win effect. An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as “x2”, “x3”, “pseudo”, Including the effect to execute the variable effect of the decorative pattern. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects shown below.

In addition, in FIG. 52(C), there is a case where the decorative design is not stop-displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L (for example, a blank design is stop-displayed). In this case, the target effect is unsuccessful, and the chance-up effect of FIG. 52(D) is not performed.

[Decorative pattern target effect B]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect A. FIG.
In the decorative symbol target effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8R has changed. set. This target area A21 is associated with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target when stopping the decorative patterns, as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative pattern 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target areas A21 corresponding to the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are set on the LBB. Further, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed within the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed within the target area A21, the decorative design 8C is variably displayed within the target area A21, and the decorative design 8R is variably displayed within the target area A21. As a result, it seems to the player that each decorative pattern is being variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. In the following description, in the decorative symbol target effect B, the effect indicating whether or not the predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as the target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative design stop effect, each decorative design is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed within the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L, the decorative design 8C is stop-displayed within the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is displayed in the decorative design 8R. is stopped within the target area A21 corresponding to . In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as a "6" pattern on the reach line LAA, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as a "6" pattern on the reach line LAB, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed on the reach line LAB. , the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed. In each target area A21, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and thus the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(D), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the teammate character CRA and the chance-up image A22 including characters representing "Super hot" are displayed, and the teammate character CRA shouts "Super hot". “Extremely hot” represented by the chance-up image A22 suggests that the expectation of a big win is very high.
It should be noted that other effects may be performed instead of this chance-up effect. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable character effect, etc. may be performed.

In FIG. 53(C), among the target areas A21, there may be a target area A21 in which the decorative pattern is not statically displayed (for example, a blank pattern may be statically displayed in a specific target region A21). In this case, the target effect is unsuccessful, and the chance-up effect of FIG. 53(D) is not performed.

[Decorative pattern target effect C]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect C. FIG.
In the decorative symbol target effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8R has changed. set. This target area A21 is associated with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target when stopping the decorative patterns, as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative pattern 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target areas A21 corresponding to the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are set on the LBB. Further, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed within the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed within the target area A21, the decorative design 8C is variably displayed within the target area A21, and the decorative design 8R is variably displayed within the target area A21. As a result, it seems to the player that each decorative pattern is being variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. In the following description, in the decorative symbol target effect C, the effect indicating whether or not the predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also called the target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative design stop effect, each decorative design is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed within the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L, the decorative design 8C is stop-displayed within the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is displayed as the decorative design 8R. is stopped within the target area A21 corresponding to . In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a "6" pattern on the reach line LAA, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stop-displayed as a "6" pattern on the reach line LAB. In each target area A21, the same decorative pattern (here, "6" pattern) is stop-displayed, so the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, an ally character CRA and a timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value, and suggests that when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), an effect with a high degree of expectation will be executed.
Note that, instead of this timer display effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable character effect, etc. may be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 54(C), the same decorative pattern may not be statically displayed in each target area A21 (for example, a blank design may be statically displayed in a specific target area A21). In this case, the target effect is unsuccessful, and the timer display effect of FIG. 54(D) is not performed.

[Decorative pattern target effect D]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect D. FIG.
In the decorative symbol target effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative pattern 8R has changed. set. This target area A21 is associated with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target when stopping the decorative patterns, as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative pattern 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target areas A21 corresponding to the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are set on the LBB. Further, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed within the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed within the target area A21, the decorative design 8C is variably displayed within the target area A21, and the decorative design 8R is variably displayed within the target area A21. As a result, it seems to the player that each decorative pattern is being variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. In the following description, in the decorative symbol target effect D, the effect indicating whether or not the predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also called the target effect.

Also, in this target area display effect, a target symbol suggestion image A25 and a button image A24 are displayed. The button image A24 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 . The target symbol suggesting image A25 suggests a specific decorative symbol to be statically displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect. Here, the target symbol suggesting image A25 suggests that the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect is the "6" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(C), a decorative symbol stop effect (button depression effect) is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed within the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L, the decorative design 8C is stop-displayed within the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is displayed as the decorative design 8R. is stopped within the target area A21 corresponding to . In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed as a "6" pattern on the reach line LAA, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stop-displayed as a "6" pattern on the reach line LAB. In each target area A21, the decorative pattern suggested by the target pattern suggesting image A25 (here, "6" pattern) is stopped and displayed, and thus the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, an ally character CRA and a timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value, and suggests that when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), an effect with a high degree of expectation will be executed.
Note that, instead of this timer display effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a movable character effect, etc. may be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 55(C), in each target area A21, when the decorative design suggested by the target design suggesting image A25 is not statically displayed (for example, when a blank design is statically displayed in a specific target area A21, the specified (a case where a decorative design other than the decorative design suggested by the target design suggesting image A25 is stopped and displayed in the target area A21). In this case, the target effect is unsuccessful, and the timer display effect of FIG. 55(D) is not performed.

The decorative pattern target effects A to D are executed before the ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns and the ready-to-win effect is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol target effects A to D may be performed during the ready-to-win effect.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern target effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the target area A21 is displayed while the decorative symbols are being variably displayed in the decorative symbol target effect, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the target area A21. , Chance-up production and timer display production are performed. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, it is determined whether or not the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed based on whether or not the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the target area A21. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the stationary display of the decorative symbols, and to improve the amusement during the stationary display of the decorative symbols. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the decorative symbol target effect, the target area A21 is set corresponding to each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stationary display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, thereby further enhancing the interest in the stationary display of the decorative symbols. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the decorative symbol target effect, a chance Up production and timer display production are performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stationary display of each of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, thereby further enhancing interest in the stationary display of the decorative symbols. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol target effect is performed from the start of variation of the decorative symbols to before the start of the ready-to-win effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stationary display of the decorative symbols even before the ready-to-win effect, and to further improve the amusement during the stationary display of the decorative symbols. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, in the decorative symbol target effect, a specific decorative symbol (decorative symbol "6" in the above description) is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. A predetermined effect (timer display effect) is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the static display of the specific decorative symbols, and to further enhance the interest in the static display of the decorative symbols. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the decorative symbol target effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, not one decorative symbol may be stop-displayed in the target area A21, but a plurality of decorative symbols may be stop-displayed in the target area A21.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, instead of the decorative symbol in the target area A21, other objects such as characters or characters may be stopped and displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol target effects BD of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target area A21 may be set to the same reach line, or may be set to different reach lines. For example, the target area A21 may be set to reach line LAA, reach line LAB, and reach line LAC, respectively.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when setting the target area A21, not one target area A21 but a plurality of target areas A21 are set for each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. You may make it

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, another display device (also referred to as another display device) may be provided in front of the display device 7 . Then, in the decorative pattern target effect, the target area A21 may be set in another display device, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be changed and displayed still on the display device 7. Alternatively, the target area A21 may be set on the display device 7, and the variation and stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be performed on another display device.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target area A21 is set, and after the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the target area A21 is moved so that the specific decorative pattern is included in the target area A21. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of varying the decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a target area for stopping the decorative pattern on the display means,
The third display effect is a effect for performing a predetermined effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed, and the target area is displayed in the second display effect. The third display effect is performed based on the stop display of the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
The decorative pattern has a plurality of decorative pattern groups,
The target area has a plurality of target areas,
The first display effect is a effect of varying each of the plurality of decorative pattern groups,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying the plurality of target areas on the display means;
In the second display effect, the plurality of target areas are displayed in the same number as the number of the plurality of decorative pattern groups, and one decorative pattern group is associated with one target area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed based on the stop display of one decorative pattern in each of the plurality of target areas in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
The combination production is performed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the start of the ready-to-win production,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed, and the target area is displayed in the second display effect. The third display effect is performed based on the stop display of a specific decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

56 to 59, the effect of superimposing decorative symbols at the time of reach will be described below. This ready-to-win decorative symbol superimposition effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols (during the ready-to-win effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol superimposition effect at reach time is included, the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect A when reaching]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decoration symbol superimposition effect A at reach time.
In the ready-to-win decorative symbol superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), the ready-to-win effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 1, the ready-to-win state is formed by stopping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R on the ready-to-win line LX1 and displaying the decorative pattern 8C with high-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 56(A), the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the ready-to-win state is formed using the "7" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(B), ready-to-win effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Two decorative designs 8C are displayed between the decorative designs 8L and 8R. In FIG. 56(B), a "7" pattern is displayed as two decorative patterns 8C. Below, in the two decorative designs 8C, one decorative design 8C is also called the first decorative design 8C, and the other decorative design 8C is also called the second decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(C), reach effect 3 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 3, a production is executed in which the two decorative patterns 8C gradually approach each other. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, it is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C is stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move closer to the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative patterns 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Also, the first decorative pattern 8C is stopped, the second decorative pattern 8C moves closer to the first decorative pattern 8C, then the second decorative pattern 8C is stopped, and then the first decoration. The pattern 8C may move toward the direction of the second decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach production 4, two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (combined) to produce one decorative pattern 8C, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" pattern) are displayed on the reach line LX1. ) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(E), a big win symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" patterns) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the big win symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved and moved to the unfolded position, and the effect of emphasizing the big win is performed.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect B when reaching]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining decorative symbol superimposition effect B at reach time.
In the ready-to-win decorative symbol superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the ready-to-win effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win performance 1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped on the ready-to-reach line LX1 and the ready-to-reach line LX3, and the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W ready-to-win state (double reach state). . In FIG. 57(A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the "7" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. On the reach line LX3, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" pattern, and the "6" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbols and "7" symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Two decorative designs 8C are displayed between the decorative designs 8L and 8R. In FIG. 57(B), a "6" pattern is displayed as two decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(C), reach effect 3 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 3, a production is executed in which the two decorative patterns 8C gradually approach each other. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, it is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C is stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move closer to the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative patterns 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Also, the first decorative pattern 8C is stopped, the second decorative pattern 8C moves closer to the first decorative pattern 8C, then the second decorative pattern 8C is stopped, and then the first decoration. The pattern 8C may move toward the direction of the second decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(D), ready-to-win effect 4 is executed. In this reach production 4, two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (combined) to produce one decorative pattern 8C, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("6" pattern) are displayed on the reach line LX3. ) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(E), a big win symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("6" patterns) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the big win symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved and moved to the unfolded position, and the effect of emphasizing the big win is performed.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect C at reach time]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect C at reach time.
In the ready-to-win decorative symbol superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the ready-to-win effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win performance 1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped on the ready-to-reach line LX1 and the ready-to-reach line LX3, and the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W ready-to-win state (double reach state). . In FIG. 58(A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" pattern, and the "7" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. On the reach line LX3, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" pattern, and the "6" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbols and "7" symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(B), ready-to-win effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Two decorative designs 8C are displayed between the decorative designs 8L and 8R. In FIG. 58(B), a "6" pattern is displayed as two decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), reach effect 3 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 3, a production is executed in which the two decorative patterns 8C gradually approach each other. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, it is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C is stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move closer to the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative patterns 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Also, the first decorative pattern 8C is stopped, the second decorative pattern 8C moves closer to the first decorative pattern 8C, then the second decorative pattern 8C is stopped, and then the first decoration. The pattern 8C may move toward the direction of the second decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 4, two decorative patterns 8C are united to produce one decorative pattern 8C. In this case, the decorative design 8C before the combination is the "6" design, but the decorative design 8C after the combination is the "8" design. The decorative pattern 8C after being combined has a lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being combined. As a result, a losing pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the reach line LX3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(E), ready-to-win effect 5 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 5, the decorative pattern 8C again changes at a low speed, and the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Two decorative designs 8C are displayed between the decorative designs 8L and 8R. In FIG. 58(E), a "7" pattern is displayed as two decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(F), ready-to-win effect 6 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 3, a production is executed in which the two decorative patterns 8C gradually approach each other. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C may be stopped and the second decorative design 8C may move closer to the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative patterns 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Also, the first decorative pattern 8C is stopped, the second decorative pattern 8C moves closer to the first decorative pattern 8C, then the second decorative pattern 8C is stopped, and then the first decoration. The pattern 8C may move toward the direction of the second decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(G), ready-to-win effect 7 is executed. In this reach production 7, two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (unified) to produce one decorative pattern 8C, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" pattern) are displayed on the reach line LX3. ) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(H), a big win symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" patterns) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the big win symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved and moved to the unfolded position, and the effect of emphasizing the big win is performed.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect D when reaching]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decoration symbol superimposition effect D at reach time.
In the ready-to-win decorative symbol superimposition effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the ready-to-win effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 1, the ready-to-win state is formed by stopping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R on the ready-to-win line LX1 and displaying the decorative pattern 8C with high-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 59(A), the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the ready-to-win state is formed using the "7" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Two decorative designs 8C are displayed between the decorative designs 8L and 8R. In FIG. 59(B), a "7" pattern is displayed as two decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), reach effect 3 is executed. In this ready-to-win production 3, a production is executed in which the two decorative patterns 8C gradually approach each other. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C may be stopped and the second decorative design 8C may move closer to the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative patterns 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Also, the first decorative pattern 8C is stopped, the second decorative pattern 8C moves closer to the first decorative pattern 8C, then the second decorative pattern 8C is stopped, and then the first decoration. The pattern 8C may move toward the direction of the second decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach production 4, two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (combined) to produce one decorative pattern 8C, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" pattern) are displayed on the reach line LX1. ) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the jackpot symbol display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared with the ready-to-win effect 4 o'clock. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C may be displayed large enough to overlap with the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the jackpot symbol display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot pattern display performance 2, a jackpot pattern array using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (“7” patterns) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the big win symbol display effect 2, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position, and the effect of emphasizing the big win is performed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decoration design superimposition production at the time of reach is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the ready-to-win decorative pattern superimposition effect, in the ready-to-win effects 2 and 5, two decorative patterns 8C are arranged so as not to overlap on the line LX2, and in the ready-to-win effects 3 and 6, two decorative patterns 8C are arranged. The decorative patterns 8C are brought close to each other, and the two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (combined) in ready-to-win performances 4 and 7 to generate a decorative pattern 8C with low transparency, and the decorative patterns 8C and the decoration to form a ready-to-win state. A jackpot pattern array is formed using the patterns 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, two decorative patterns 8C with high transparency are superimposed (combined) to form a jackpot pattern array, so the player pays attention to the two decorative patterns 8C and then superimposes them. (union) is expected. As a result, the interest in the ready-to-win presentation can be greatly improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the ready-to-win decorative pattern superimposition effect, the two decorative patterns 8C to be superimposed in the ready-to-win effect and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the ready-to-win state are the same pattern. According to this configuration, the player can recognize that if two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (combined), it will be a big win, and the superimposition performance of the two decorative patterns 8C is greatly exciting, and the game is more interesting. can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the ready-to-win decorative pattern superimposition effect, the decorative pattern 8C generated by superimposing two decorative patterns 8C in the ready-to-win effect and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the ready-to-win state. Use to construct a jackpot pattern array. According to this constitution, the player wins big when the two decorative patterns 8C are superimposed (combined), so that the performance of superimposing the two decorative patterns 8C is greatly exciting, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stop-displayed in the ready-to-win decorative symbol superimposition effects B and C to form the W reach state, and the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed. In the ready-to-win decorative pattern superimposition production B, the superimposed decorative patterns 8C are used to form a jackpot pattern array on the reach line LX3, and in the ready-to-win decorative pattern superimposed production C, the superimposed decorative patterns 8C are used. Thus, a jackpot pattern arrangement is formed on the reach line LX1. According to this configuration, if the superposition of the two decorative patterns 8C succeeds in either of the two superimposition effects using the two decorative patterns 8C, a big win is achieved, so that the player is placed in a single reach state. It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the superimposed effect in the W reach state than in time. As a result, the effect of superimposing the two decorative patterns 8C becomes very lively, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach, after executing the big win symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved and moved to the expanded position to perform the effect emphasizing the big win. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize to the player that the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed in the ready-to-win state, and that the player has won a big win. When experiencing the superimposed effect of 8C, expectations can be imparted to the superimposed effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the decoration symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the ready-to-win decorative pattern superimposition effect of the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern 8C generated by superimposing two decorative patterns 8C and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the ready-to-win state are used in the ready-to-win effect. Instead of a jackpot symbol array, a chance symbol array representing a chance symbol, a look-ahead suggestive symbol array suggesting a look-ahead performance (pre-judgment performance), and a pseudo-continuous performance suggestive pattern array suggesting a pseudo-continuous performance are formed. good too.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern superimposition effect at reach time of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of moving the second movable accessory 15 to the expanded position is performed when the two decorative patterns 8C are successfully superimposed. good too.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach and the character appearance effect, which will be described later, may be performed with the same variation. For example, in the same variation, after executing the character appearance production, the decorative pattern superimposition production at the time of reach may be performed, or after the decorative pattern superimposition production at the time of reach, the character appearance production may be performed, or at the time of reach. The decorative pattern superimposition effect and the character appearance effect may be performed simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the two highly transparent decorative patterns 8C are displayed in the decorative pattern superimposition effect at the time of reach, predetermined characters are displayed in the background of these two decorative patterns 8C. may After that, when the two decorative patterns 8C are successfully superimposed, the decorative patterns 8C generated by the superimposition may make some or all of these characters or characters invisible.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the ready-to-win state and the decorative pattern 8C formed by superimposing the first decorative pattern 8C and the second decorative pattern 8C are exactly the same pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern 8C formed by superimposing the first decorative pattern 8C and the second decorative pattern 8C may be a pattern including portions similar to the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the ready-to-win state. For example, the number portion of the decorative pattern 8C formed by superimposing the first decorative pattern 8C and the second decorative pattern 8C and the number portions of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state are the same, and other The parts can be different.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of forming a first ready-to-reach state using a first decorative pattern,
In the second display effect, a second decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern is displayed at a first position, and a third decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern is displayed. is displayed at a second position different from the first position,
In the third display effect, the second decorative design is moved from the first position, the third decorative design is moved from the second position, and the second decorative design and the third decorative design are displayed. 3 decorative designs are superimposed to generate the second decorative design and the fourth decorative design having lower transparency than the third decorative design,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect. is performed, and the first decorative pattern forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative pattern generated in the third display effect are used. a first symbol array is formed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The fourth decorative pattern generated in the third display effect is a pattern including the same portion as the first decorative pattern forming the first reach state in the first display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
The first pattern array is formed by using the first decorative pattern forming the first ready-to-reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative pattern generated in the third display effect. A jackpot pattern array is formed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
The first display effect uses the first decorative pattern to form a first ready-to-reach state, and uses a fifth decorative pattern to create a second ready-to-reach state different from the first ready-to-reach state. It is a production that forms,
In the combination effect, the fifth decorative pattern forming the second ready-to-reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative pattern generated in the third display effect are used to create the second display effect. pattern array is formed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
In the combination performance, after the first pattern array is formed, a role performance is performed in which a predetermined role is moved,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The character appearance effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. This character appearance effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the target area display effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Character appearance effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect A. FIG.
In the character appearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in a losing pattern arrangement. In FIG. 60(A), the decorative design 8L is a "6" design, the decorative design 8C is a "8" design, and the decorative design 8R is a "7" design. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-reach formation performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped on the ready-to-reach line LX1 and the ready-to-reach line LX3, and the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W ready-to-reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 60(A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed with the "6" pattern, and the "6" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. On the reach line LX3, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the "7" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. That is, the W reach state of "6" pattern and "7" pattern is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative pattern 8C changes at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In addition, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged behind (behind) the ornamental pattern 8C that changes at low speed. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is positioned behind (behind) the decorative pattern 8C. Also, the decorative pattern 8C has a degree of transparency that makes the character image A41 completely invisible to the player. Note that the decorative pattern 8C may have a degree of transparency that allows the character image A41 to be seen slightly. In FIG. 60(D), a "7" pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), character appearance effect 2 is executed. In this character appearance effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency is higher than in the character appearance effect 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C is visible to the player.

In addition, in the character appearance productions 1 and 2, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped.

In the character appearance effect 2, when the character image A41 appears, next, a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this way, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests the development of a super ready-to-win effect.

[Character Appearance Effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect B. FIG.
In the character appearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in a losing pattern arrangement. In FIG. 60(A), the decorative design 8L is a "6" design, the decorative design 8C is a "8" design, and the decorative design 8R is a "7" design. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-reach formation performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the ready-to-reach line LX3, and the decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed at high speed to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 61(A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" pattern, and the "6" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. On the reach line LX3, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the "7" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbols and "7" symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative pattern 8C is changed at a low speed and displayed between the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In addition, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged behind (behind) the decoration pattern 8C that changes at low speed. In this case, a part of the character image A41 is positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C and a part protrudes from the decorative pattern 8C. Also, the decorative pattern 8C has such a degree of transparency as to make the character image A41 completely invisible to the player. However, the decorative pattern 8C is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8C may have a degree of transparency that allows the character image A41 to be seen slightly. In FIG. 61(D), a "7" pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), character appearance effect 2 is executed. In this character appearance effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency is higher than in the character appearance effect 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 (part) positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C is visible to the player, that is, the entire character image A41 is visible to the player.

In addition, in the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped.

In the character appearance effect 2, when the character image A41 appears, next, a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this way, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests the development of a super ready-to-win effect.

[Character Appearance Effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect C. FIG.
In the character appearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a losing pattern arrangement. In FIG. 60(A), the decorative design 8L is a "6" design, the decorative design 8C is a "8" design, and the decorative design 8R is a "7" design. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-reach formation performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the ready-to-reach line LX3, and the decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed at high speed to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 62(A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed with the "6" pattern, and the "6" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. On the reach line LX3, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the "7" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbols and "7" symbols is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), a big win confirmation effect is executed. In this jackpot finalization performance, the decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed as a "7" pattern, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all "7" patterns, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R form a jackpot pattern arrangement. This allows the player to know that he/she has won a big hit. In addition, in this big hit confirmation effect, the character image A41 is arranged behind (behind) the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C. Also, the decorative pattern 8C has a degree of transparency that makes the character image A41 completely invisible to the player. Note that the decorative pattern 8C may have a degree of transparency that allows the character image A41 to be seen slightly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), a character appearance effect is executed. In this character appearance effect, the decorative pattern 8C has a higher degree of transparency than in the big win confirmation effect. Therefore, in this character appearance effect, the character image A41 positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C is visible to the player.

It should be noted that, in the above-described jackpot determination production, the character image A41 is configured so that the entire area is positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C, but the character image A41 is partially positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C and partly decorated. It may be configured to protrude from the pattern 8C.

In the character appearance effect, when the character image A41 appears, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that something advantageous to the player will occur. For example, when the character image A41 appears, the appearance of the character image A41 may suggest that there is a jackpot in the hold (hold ball consecutive chan), and in the jackpot game, 16R (maximum round Number) It may be suggested that it is a definite jackpot, or it may be suggested that the game state after the jackpot game is in a state advantageous to the player (probability variable state).

[Character Appearance Effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect D. FIG.
In the character appearance effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in a losing pattern arrangement. In FIG. 60(A), the decorative design 8L is a "6" design, the decorative design 8C is a "8" design, and the decorative design 8R is a "7" design. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-reach formation performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped on the ready-to-reach line LX1 and the ready-to-reach line LX3, and the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W ready-to-reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 63(A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" pattern, and the "6" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. On the reach line LX3, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" pattern, and the "7" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. That is, the W reach state of "6" pattern and "7" pattern is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative pattern 8C is changed at a low speed and displayed between the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In addition, in the character appearance effect 1, two character images A43 are arranged behind (behind) the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, respectively. In this case, the character image A41 is partly protruding from the decorative pattern and partly positioned behind the decorative pattern 8C. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a degree of transparency that makes the character image A43 completely invisible to the player. However, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may have a degree of transparency that allows the character image A43 to be seen slightly. In FIG. 63(D), a "7" pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), character appearance effect 2 is executed. In this character appearance effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is higher than in the character appearance effect 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A43 positioned behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is visible to the player.

In addition, in the character appearance productions 1 and 2, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped. Further, in the above-described character appearance effect 1, the character image A43 may be configured such that the entire area is arranged behind the decorative pattern 8L or the decorative pattern 8R.

In the character appearance effect 2, when the character image A43 appears, next, a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this way, the appearance of the character image A43 suggests the development of a super ready-to-win effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A to C, when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with relatively high transparency, the character image A41 is arranged behind the 8 decorative pattern 8C, After that, when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with relatively low transparency, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern 8C. Further, in the character appearance effect D, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed with relatively high transparency, the character image A43 is arranged behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. After that, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed with relatively low transparency, the character image A43 is visible through the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative pattern appears as the transparency of the decorative pattern increases, so that the player can be given a great sense of surprise. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, the character image A41 is arranged behind the 8 decorative patterns 8C when the decorative patterns 8C are displayed with a relatively high degree of transparency. After that, when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with relatively low transparency, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern 8C. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative pattern 8C during variable display appears as the transparency of the decorative pattern increases, so that the player is given a great sense of surprise during the variable display of the decorative pattern. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, after the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high-speed variation, when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with relatively high transparency and with low-speed variation, the character image is displayed. When A41 is placed behind the decorative pattern 8C and then the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with relatively low transparency, the character image A41 is visible through the decorative pattern 8C. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative pattern 8C during the low-speed fluctuation display appears as the transparency of the decorative pattern increases, so that the appearance of the character image can impress the player. can give a sense of surprise to As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effect C, the character image A41 is arranged behind the statically displayed decorative pattern 8C, which is a decorative pattern 8C with a relatively high degree of transparency. According to this configuration, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible to the player through the statically displayed decorative pattern 8C, so that the appearance of the character image can be thoroughly impressed on the player. As a result, even when the decorative pattern 8C is statically displayed and the player is bored, it is possible to provide the player with a large sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the character image may be arranged behind the decorative pattern with relatively low transparency in the character appearance effect 1, the big win confirmation effect, and the like. At this time, (all or part of) the character image becomes invisible to the player due to the decoration pattern. According to this configuration, by creating the invisible state, the next character appearance can be emphasized, and the character appearance effect can be made more interesting. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the character appearance effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests developing into a super ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the appearance of the character image A41 may suggest development of a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a chance-up effect, or the like. In this case, when the character image A41 appears, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, and a chance-up effect are performed.
Also, the appearance of the character image A41 may suggest a big win.

[Modification 2]
In the character appearance effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the character images A41 and A43 appear during the character appearance effect 1 and the big win confirmation effect, but during the decorative pattern stop effect, the fluctuation start effect, and the reach formation effect. You may make it do at time. After that, the character appearance effect and the big win determination effect shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, first, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed with low-speed fluctuation in the "6" pattern, and at that time, the character appearance effect 1 is executed, and then the decorative pattern 8C. may be displayed in low-speed variation with the symbol "7", and the character appearance effect 2 may be executed at that time. That is, in the character appearance effects A, B, and D, in the W reach state, character appearance effect 1 is first performed with the reach of one reach line, and character appearance effect 2 is performed with the reach of the other reach line. may

[Modification 4]
In the character appearance effects A to C of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the character image A41 is the decorative pattern 8C (for example, In FIG. 60, it is arranged so as to be hidden behind the "7" pattern) and appears when the transparency of the decorative pattern 8C increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character appearance production, the character image A41 is a decorative pattern 8C that cannot form a jackpot pattern array together with the decorative patterns 8L and 8R when stopped (for example, "8" pattern in the situation of FIG. 60). It may be arranged so as to be hidden behind the decorative pattern 8C and appear when the transparency of the decorative pattern 8C is increased.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying the decorative pattern with a first transparency,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying the decorative pattern with a second transparency higher than the first transparency,
The third display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined character,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed while the second display effect is being performed. , the predetermined character in the third display effect may be arranged behind the decorative pattern displayed with the second degree of transparency, and may be displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of forming a ready-to-win state using the decorative pattern,
The decorative patterns in the reach state include decorative patterns in the stopped state and decorative patterns in the fluctuating state,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the fourth display effect is being performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative pattern in the varying state has the second transparency. , and the predetermined character is placed behind the decorative pattern in the varying state, and may be displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the decorative pattern in the varying state is displayed in a low speed variation display from a high speed variation display, and the predetermined character is arranged behind the decorative pattern displayed in the low speed variation display. , may be visible through the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2 or aspect A4-3,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the fourth display effect is being performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative pattern in the stopped state has the second transparency. , and the predetermined character is placed behind the decorative pattern in the stopped state, and may be displayed so as to be visible through the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect or the second display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed. When the third display effect is performed at 10:00 a.m., the predetermined character is placed behind the decorative pattern displayed with the first transparency, and may be invisible due to the decorative pattern. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The jackpot symbol arrangement display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. This jackpot pattern arrangement display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative patterns, during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the jackpot pattern array display effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are transferred from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Jackpot pattern array display effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect A. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win state is formed by stopping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R on the ready-to-win line LN1 and displaying the decorative pattern 8C in a high-speed fluctuation manner. In FIG. 64(A), the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" pattern, and the "6" pattern is used to form the ready-to-win state. Note that the reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a W reach effect is executed. In this W-reach performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in a stopped state on the reach line LN2 while the decorative pattern 8C is maintained in the high-speed fluctuation display state, so that the W-reach state is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. is formed. In FIG. 64(C), the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" and "7" patterns, and the W reach state is formed using the "6" and "7" patterns. Note that the reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect, and the two lines form an "X".

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a big win display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display presentation 1, a jackpot pattern array is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the reach line LN1 by stop-displaying the "6" pattern of the decorative pattern 8C on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 64(D), a jackpot pattern arrangement of "6" patterns is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a big win display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 2, a jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN4. A line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 64(E), a jackpot pattern arrangement of the same "6" patterns as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win game effect, in the big win game effect, the same big win pattern array as that displayed in the big win display effect is displayed on the line LN5. A line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 64(F), a jackpot pattern arrangement of the same "6" patterns as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Also, in the jackpot game effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement image A51 is displayed. This big win pattern arrangement image A51 is a capture screen in the case of the big win display effect 1, that is, represents the reach line of the big win in the big win display effect 1 and the information of the big win pattern arrangement. In addition, in the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting hitting to the right, an image representing acquired ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

64(A) to (E) are performed during the same variation, and the effect of FIG. 64(F) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any variation. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 64(E) to (F) are not limited to this, and may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit pattern array display effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect B. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win state is formed by stopping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R on the ready-to-win line LN1 and displaying the decorative pattern 8C in a high-speed fluctuation manner. In FIG. 65(A), the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" pattern, and the ready-to-win state is formed using the "6" pattern. Note that the reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a W reach effect is executed. In this W-reach performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in a stopped state on the reach line LN2 while the decorative pattern 8C is maintained in the high-speed fluctuation display state, so that the W-reach state is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. is formed. In FIG. 65(C), the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" and "7" patterns, and the W reach state is formed using the "6" and "7" patterns. Note that the reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect, and the two lines form an "X".

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a big win display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 1, a jackpot pattern array is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the reach line LN1 by stop-displaying the "6" pattern of the decorative pattern 8C on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 65(D), a jackpot pattern arrangement of "6" patterns is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a big win display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display performance 2, a jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN4. A line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 65(E), a jackpot pattern array of "6" patterns, which is the same as the jackpot display effect 1, is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(F), a big win display effect 3 is executed. In this big win display effect 3, a big win pattern arrangement is displayed on the line LN6. A line LN6 is a line substantially in the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 2. - 特許庁In FIG. 65(F), a jackpot pattern arrangement of the same "6" patterns as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win game effect, in the big win game effect, the same big win pattern array as that displayed in the big win display effect is displayed on the line LN5. A line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 65(G), a jackpot pattern array of the same "6" patterns as in jackpot display effect 2 is formed on line LN5. Also, in the jackpot game effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement image A51 is displayed. This big win pattern arrangement image A51 is a capture screen in the case of the big win display effect 1, that is, represents the reach line of the big win in the big win display effect 1 and the information of the big win pattern arrangement. In addition, in the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting hitting to the right, an image representing acquired ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

65(A) to (F) are performed during the same variation, and the effect of FIG. 65(G) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any variation. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 65(E) to (G) may be performed during the jackpot game without being limited to this.

[Jackpot pattern array display effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect C. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win state is formed by stopping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R on the ready-to-win line LN1 and displaying the decorative pattern 8C in a high-speed fluctuation manner. In FIG. 66(A), the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" pattern, and the ready-to-win state is formed using the "6" pattern. Note that the reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a W reach effect is executed. In this W-reach performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in a stopped state on the reach line LN2 while the decorative pattern 8C is maintained in the high-speed fluctuation display state, so that the W-reach state is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. is formed. In FIG. 66(C), the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" and "7" patterns, and the W reach state is formed using the "6" and "7" patterns. Note that the reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect, and the two lines form an "X".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), a big win display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 1, a jackpot pattern array is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the reach line LN1 by stop-displaying the "6" pattern of the decorative pattern 8C on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 66(D), a jackpot pattern array of "6" patterns is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a big win display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C overlaps the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), a big win display effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot display performance 3, a jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN4. A line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 66(F), a jackpot pattern array of "6" patterns, which is the same as the jackpot display effect 1, is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), big win display effect 4 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN6. A line LN6 is a line substantially in the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display performance 3. - 特許庁In FIG. 66(G), a jackpot pattern arrangement of the same "6" patterns as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win game effect, the same big win pattern arrangement as that displayed in the big win display effect is displayed on the line LN5. A line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 66(G), a jackpot pattern array of the same "6" patterns as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Also, in the jackpot game presentation, a jackpot pattern arrangement image A51 is displayed. This big win pattern arrangement image A51 is a capture screen in the case of the big win display effect 1, that is, represents the reach line of the big win in the big win display effect 1 and the information of the big win pattern arrangement. In addition, in the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting hitting to the right, an image representing acquired ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

66(A) to (G) are performed during the same variation, and the effect of FIG. 66(G) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any variation. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 66(F) to (H) may be performed during the jackpot game without being limited to this.

[Jackpot pattern array display effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect D. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. In this ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win state is formed by stopping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R on the ready-to-win line LN1 and displaying the decorative pattern 8C in a high-speed fluctuation manner. In FIG. 67(A), the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" pattern, and the ready-to-win state is formed using the "6" pattern. Note that the reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a W reach effect is executed. In this W-reach performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in a stopped state on the reach line LN2 while the decorative pattern 8C is maintained in the high-speed fluctuation display state, so that the W-reach state is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. is formed. In FIG. 67(C), the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" and "7" patterns, and the W reach state is formed using the "6" and "7" patterns. Note that the reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect, and the two lines form an "X".

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), a big win display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 1, a jackpot pattern array is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the reach line LN1 by stop-displaying the "6" pattern of the decorative pattern 8C on the reach line LN1. In FIG. 67(D), a jackpot pattern arrangement of "6" patterns is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a big win display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C overlaps the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), a character movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the advanced position and moved to the front of the display screen 7a. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the reach line LN1. That is, the player can visually recognize the jackpot pattern array on the reach line LN1 from the area not covered with the second movable role 15 on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), a big win display effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot display performance 3, a jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN4. A line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 67(F), a jackpot pattern arrangement of the same "6" patterns as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), big win display effect 4 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN6. A line LN6 is a line substantially in the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN6 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display presentation 3. - 特許庁In FIG. 67(G), a jackpot pattern arrangement of the same "6" pattern as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(I), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win game effect, the same big win pattern arrangement as that displayed in the big win display effect is displayed on the line LN5. A line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot pattern array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot pattern array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. - 特許庁In FIG. 67(G), a jackpot pattern arrangement of the same "6" patterns as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Also, in the jackpot game presentation, a jackpot pattern arrangement image A51 is displayed. This big win pattern arrangement image A51 is a capture screen in the case of the big win display effect 1, that is, represents the reach line of the big win in the big win display effect 1 and the information of the big win pattern arrangement. In addition, in the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting hitting to the right, an image representing acquired ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

The effects shown in FIGS. 67A to 67H are performed during the same variation, and the effect shown in FIG. 67I is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any variation. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 67(G) to (I) are not limited to this, and may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the jackpot pattern arrangement display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot pattern arrangement display effect, a reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, a W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then, on the reach line LN1 A jackpot pattern array is displayed, and then the jackpot pattern array is displayed on line LN4 and line LN5. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the performance of decorative patterns on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then, by displaying the jackpot pattern array on the reach line LN1 and on the line LN4 or line LN5, The jackpot pattern arrangement can be displayed by changing the viewpoint to the player, emphasizing the jackpot and amplifying the player's joy of winning the jackpot. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot pattern arrangement display effect, the reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, the W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the reach line LN1 is formed. The jackpot pattern array is displayed, then the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN4, and then the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN5 during the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the performance of decorative patterns on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and after that, the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the line LN4, so that the player can enjoy. The jackpot pattern array can be displayed by changing the viewpoint, and the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the line LN5 during the jackpot game, so that the jackpot is emphasized and the player's joy of winning the jackpot is enhanced. can be amplified. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot pattern array display effect, an effect in which the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the reach line LN1 (for example, FIG. 64 (D)), on the line LN4, on the line LN5, or This is performed during the same variation as the effect (for example, FIG. 64(E)) in which the jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed on the line LN6. According to this constitution, since the jackpot pattern arrangement can be displayed by changing the viewpoint to the player during the same fluctuation, the jackpot is emphasized during the same fluctuation, and the player's joy of winning the jackpot is further amplified. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot pattern array display effect, the jackpot pattern array displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1 is larger than the jackpot pattern arrays arranged on the lines LN4 and LN5. Is displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the big win pattern arrangement large at the beginning of the big win display performance, the big win can be emphasized, and the player's joy of winning the big win can be amplified. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot pattern array display effect D, after the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1, the jackpot pattern array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 2. After a part is enlarged and displayed, a big win pattern array is displayed on the line LN4 in a big win display performance 3. - 特許庁According to this configuration, the big win can be emphasized by displaying the big win pattern arrangement in a large size, and the player's joy of winning the big win can be amplified. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the jackpot pattern arrangement display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot pattern array display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot pattern array displayed on the line LN4 may be displayed larger than the jackpot pattern array displayed on the reach line LN1.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot pattern array display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot pattern arrays arranged on the reach line LN1, the reach line LN2, the line LN4, the line LN5, and the line LN6 are the same as the decorative patterns. Part or all may overlap. Also, the jackpot pattern arrays arranged on the reach line LN1, the reach line LN2, the line LN4, the line LN5, and the line LN6 may be enlarged or reduced, or may be contracted. You can move.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot pattern array display effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the movable character effect is performed between the big win display effect 2 and the big win display effect 3. and the jackpot display performance 2, between the jackpot display performance 3 and the jackpot display performance 4, between the jackpot display performance 4 and the jackpot game performance, these jackpot display performances or during the jackpot game performance. may Also, the size of the jackpot pattern array and the line on which the jackpot pattern array is displayed may be changed before and after the performance of moving the accessory.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a reach state effect by stop-displaying a decorative pattern on the first line of the display means,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a first jackpot pattern array by stopping and displaying the decorative patterns on the first line,
The third display effect is a reach state effect by stop-displaying the decorative pattern on the second line different from the first line of the display means,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a second jackpot pattern array by stop-displaying decorative symbols on a third line different from the first line and the second line,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the first display effect and the third display effect are performed. After the display effect, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a third jackpot pattern arrangement by stopping and displaying decorative patterns on a fourth line different from the first line, the second line, and the third line. It is a production that displays
The combination effect is a effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect and during the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the combination effect, the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed during the same fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-3,
The first jackpot pattern array in the second display effect is larger than the second jackpot pattern array in the fourth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect of enlarging and displaying the first jackpot pattern array,
The combined effect is a effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and the fourth display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol jackpot suggestive effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. FIG. This decorative symbol jackpot suggestive effect can be executed in relation to the variable display of the decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). Incidentally, the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effects A, B, and C are reserved jackpot suggestions, and the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effects D are the variation jackpot suggestions.

[Decorative pattern jackpot suggestion production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A. FIG.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 68(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 68(A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the variation result shown in FIG. 68(A) is lost. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are provided with an upper line JL and a lower line GL as prescribed stop positions. , are aligned horizontally along the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stop. That is, in the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68(B), the losing symbol arrangement is shown in two upper and lower stages. In this example, this losing pattern arrangement shows "869" on the upper line JL and "958" on the lower line GL.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 68(B), as shown in FIG. 68(C), there is a case where the left decorative symbol downward displacement stop effect is executed. This left decorative pattern lower shift stop effect shows a state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped after being moved, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stopped at the upper line JL and the lower line GL which are the prescribed stop positions. However, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative designs 8C and 8R have "77" on the upper line JL and "66" on the lower line GL. "6" is shown shifted downward from GL. In other words, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative pattern downward displacement stop effect is the pattern arrangement in which "5" out of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the pattern arrangement in which "666" is shifted downward to the left "6" indicates a pattern array shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is deviated from the prescribed stop position, it becomes a lost pattern arrangement. Therefore, "666", which is a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or lower line GL, which are the prescribed stop positions, is also a losing pattern arrangement in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68(C). Become.
In this example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displaced downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. It is also possible that the line JL and the lower line GL are displaced downward and stopped.

Further, instead of FIG. 68(B), as shown in FIG. 68(D), there is a case where a right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect is executed. This right decorative pattern upper shift stop effect shows a state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after being changed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C are stopped at the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are the prescribed stop positions. However, the left decorative pattern 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative designs 8L and 8C have "68" on the upper line JL and "77" on the lower line GL. "7" is shown shifted upward from GL. That is, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the right decorative pattern upper shift stop effect is that the right "8" of "688" is shifted upward from the upper line JL, and the pattern arrangement of "777". "7" on the right of , indicates a pattern arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, "777", which is a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which are the prescribed stop positions, is also a losing pattern arrangement in the right decorative symbol upward displacement stop effect shown in FIG. 68(D). Become.
In this example, the right decorative pattern 8R is displaced upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. It is also possible that the line JL and the lower line GL are displaced upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This big win determination effect is performed after the left decorative symbol lower deviation stop effect shown in FIG. 68(C) or the right decorative symbol upper deviation stop effect shown in FIG. 68(D) is performed. In this big hit fixed effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this jackpot finalization effect, the first special symbol is held from the left decorative symbol lower deviation stop effect shown in FIG. 68(C) or the right decorative symbol upper deviation stop effect shown in FIG. 68(D). It shows a state in which two pieces have been digested. The jackpot pattern array "777" indicated by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the variation result of the second reservation of the first special pattern. In addition, in the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 68(E), the jackpot pattern array "777" is displayed alone (one row) substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, The character "big hit ~!" is displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.
Incidentally, the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 68(E) is performed by performing the left decorative symbol downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68(C) or the right decorative symbol upward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68(D). Even in such a case, it is not always performed, and there may be cases where the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68(B) is performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 68, when any one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shifts from the prescribed stop position and stops in the predetermined variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. is likely to become a big hit in the variation related to holding after a predetermined variation. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, if the contents of the reservation are read ahead and there is a big hit, the decorative symbols 8L, 8L, and 8R are displayed as a jackpot suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.). Either 8C or 8R is deviated from the prescribed stop position and stopped. Moreover, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting performance A, the symbol array that is shifted and stopped from the specified stop position (losing symbol array) is indicated by the symbol array that will become the big win pattern array if stopped at the specified stop position. This suggests (suggests) that the player will get a big win.

[Decorative pattern jackpot suggestion B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect B. FIG.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 69A, the decorative symbol variation performance is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 69(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 69(A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the left decorative symbol downward displacement stop blue effect effect is executed. This left decorative pattern lower shift stop blue effect shows a state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped after being moved. However, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative designs 8C and 8R have "77" on the upper line JL and "66" on the lower line GL. "6" is shown shifted downward from GL. In other words, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative pattern downward displacement stop effect is the pattern arrangement in which "5" out of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the pattern arrangement in which "666" is shifted downward to the left "6" indicates a pattern array shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is deviated from the prescribed stop position, it becomes a lost pattern arrangement. Therefore, "666", which is a jackpot symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or lower line GL, which are the prescribed stop positions, is also a losing pattern arrangement in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68(C). Become.
In this example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displaced downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. It is also possible that the line JL and the lower line GL are displaced downward and stopped.
Furthermore, in the pattern arrangement in which the left “6” of “666” is shifted downward from the lower line GL, water droplets are added so as to surround the “6”, which is the stop pattern of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. A simulated blue effect image is displayed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 69(B), as shown in FIG. 69(C), there is a case where the left decorative symbol downward displacement stop red effect effect is executed. This left decorative symbol bottom shift stop red effect effect is similar to the left decorative symbol bottom shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. Among them, "5" indicates a pattern array shifted downward from the upper line JL, and left "6" of "666" indicates a pattern array shifted downward from the lower line GL. In the pattern arrangement where the left "6" is shifted downward from the lower line GL, a red effect image imitating a flame surrounds the "6", which is the stop pattern of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This losing pattern stop effect is performed after the left decorative pattern lower shift stop blue effect shown in FIG. 69(B) or the left decorative pattern lower shift stop red effect shown in FIG. 69(C) is performed. is. In this lost symbol stop effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is changed from "3" to "1". In other words, in this losing symbol stop effect, the left decorative symbol downward shift stop blue effect shown in FIG. 69(B) or the left decorative symbol downward shift stop red effect shown in FIG. It shows how two reserved special symbols have been digested. That is, the losing pattern array indicated by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the variation result of the second holding of the first special pattern, and "869" on the upper line JL and "958" on the lower line GL. "It is shown.
It should be noted that the probability that this losing symbol stop effect is performed is higher when the left decorative symbol bottom shift stop blue effect shown in FIG. 69(B) is performed. It is higher than when the stop red effect production is performed.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 69(D), as shown in FIG. 69(E), the big win confirmation effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect is similar to the above-described losing pattern stop effect shown in FIG. This is an effect that is performed after the left decorative pattern bottom shift stop red effect effect is performed. In this big hit fixed effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this big hit confirmation production, the first special It shows how two reserved symbols have been digested. That is, the jackpot pattern array "777" indicated by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the variation result of the second holding of the first special pattern. In addition, in the jackpot finalization effect shown in FIG. 69(E), the jackpot pattern arrangement "777" is displayed alone (one row) substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, The character "big hit ~!" is displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.
It should be noted that the probability that this big win confirmation effect is performed is higher in the case where the left decorative symbol bottom shift stop red effect shown in FIG. 69(C) is performed, as shown in FIG. 69(B). It is higher than when the blue effect production is performed.

That is, in the decorative pattern jackpot suggesting production B shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating, a plurality of types of effect production (in this example, blue effect production and red effect production) can be executed. , and the rate of granting a jackpot changes depending on the type of effect production. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, if there is a big hit by reading the content of the reservation in advance, a plurality of types of effects are produced as a big hit suggestion production with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.). A predetermined effect production is performed from the production.

[Decorative pattern jackpot suggestion production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C. FIG.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the decorative symbol variation performance is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 70(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 70(A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the left decorative symbol "6" downward shift stop effect is executed. This left decorative pattern "6" bottom shift stop effect shows a state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped after being moved. Although stopped at GL, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative designs 8C and 8R have "77" on the upper line JL and "66" on the lower line GL. "6" is shown shifted downward from GL. That is, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative pattern "6" downward shift stop effect is the pattern arrangement in which "5" out of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the pattern arrangement in "666". Among them, "6" on the left indicates a pattern arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is deviated from the prescribed stop position, it becomes a lost pattern arrangement. Therefore, even if "666", which is a jackpot symbol array if stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which are the prescribed stop positions, the left decorative symbol "6" shown in FIG. It becomes a pattern array.
In this example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displaced downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. It is also possible that the line JL and the lower line GL are displaced downward and stopped.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 70(B), as shown in FIG. 70(C), there is a case where the right decorative symbol "7" upward shift stop effect is executed. This right decorative pattern "7" upper shift stop effect shows a state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped after being moved. Although stopped at GL, the left decorative pattern 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative designs 8L and 8C have "68" on the upper line JL and "77" on the lower line GL. "7" is shown shifted upward from GL. That is, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the right decorative pattern "7" upper shift stop effect is a pattern arrangement in which the right "8" of "688" is shifted upward from the upper line JL, "777". "7" on the right side of "" indicates a pattern arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, even if "777", which is a jackpot symbol array when stopped at the upper line JL or lower line GL which is the prescribed stop position, is lost in the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. It becomes a pattern array.
In this example, the right decorative pattern 8R is displaced upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. There may be a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, the effect is performed after the left decorative symbol "6" downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70(B) or the right decorative symbol "7" upward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70(C) is performed. is. In this ready-to-win effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this ready-to-win effect, from the left decorative pattern "6" downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70B or the right decorative pattern "7" upward shift stop effect shown in FIG. It shows how two reserved special symbols have been digested. The losing pattern array "68" on the upper line JL and the ready-to-win pattern array "77" on the lower line GL, where the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped, correspond to the variation of the second holding of the first special pattern. ing. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 70(D), characters "ready-to-win!" are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
The ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 70(D) is the left decorative symbol "6" downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70(B) or the right decorative symbol "7" upward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70(C). Even if the production is performed, it is not always performed, and there may be cases where the reach does not occur. Also, the probability of this ready-to-win effect being performed is higher when the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. It is higher than when the downward shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is performed after switching from the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 70(D), and instead of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, the player's ally character CRA and enemy character CRB battle. An image is displayed. That is, the battle effect shown in FIG. 70(E) is performed when the gaming state is ready-to-win. In addition, in this battle effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate "1" and "0" as in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 70(D).
It should be noted that the battle effect shown in FIG. 70(E) is not always performed even when the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. It is possible. In addition, the probability (battle development rate) that this battle effect is performed is higher in the case where the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. It is higher than when the decorative pattern "6" downward shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), a jackpot determination suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Victory!", the player can be made to think that the current reach will be a big hit (a privilege advantageous to the player will be given). Note that, in this jackpot determination suggestion effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 are "1" and "0" in the same manner as the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 70(D) and the battle effect shown in FIG. 70(E). ing.
Also, although not shown in the drawings, there are cases where a friendly character is defeated in a battle effect. Lost!" is displayed in large letters in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Lost!", the player can be made to think that this time's reach will not be a big hit (the player will not be given an advantageous privilege).
It should be noted that the probability that the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect (battle victory expectation) is higher in the case where the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. ) is higher than when the left decorative symbol “6” bottom shift stop effect is performed. In other words, the probability that the ally character CRA loses in the battle effect is higher when the left decorative symbol "6" shown in FIG. The symbol "7" is higher than when the upward shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation effect, a jackpot pattern array "777" is displayed instead of the characters "victory!" indicating that the teammate character CRA has won in the jackpot confirmation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 70(F). The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. In addition, in the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 70(G), the jackpot pattern array "777" is displayed alone (one stage) substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, The character "big hit ~!" is displayed.
Incidentally, as described above, when the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 70(D) was not performed (when the ready-to-reach effect did not occur), the ready-to-win effect did not develop into the battle effect shown in FIG. 70(E). 70(G), the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 70(G) is performed. Instead, a loss determination effect is performed (see FIGS. 68(B) and 69(D)).

That is, in the decorative pattern jackpot suggesting effect C shown in FIG. 70, when any one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shifts from the prescribed stop position and stops in the predetermined variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. , Depending on the type of the shifted pattern arrangement, the rate of reaching reach, the rate of development to battle after reach, and the degree of expectation for battle victory in battle production change in the fluctuations related to suspension after predetermined fluctuations. there is For example, as described above, the misaligned pattern arrangement of "777" is higher than "666" in terms of the rate of reach, the rate of development to battle after reach, and the expectation of battle victory in battle production. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect C, a plurality of game indices such as reach rate, battle development rate, and battle victory expectation are simultaneously suggested by one effect of displaying a deviated pattern arrangement.

[Decorative pattern jackpot suggestion production D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D. FIG.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 71(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 68(A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the lower stage "6" symbol ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lower "6" symbol ready-to-win effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are provided with an upper line JL and a lower line GL as pattern arrangement lines. stop at the same time, and are horizontally aligned along the upper line JL and the lower line GL. That is, in the lower stage "6" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(B), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages. "66" indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), on the display screen 7a, the lower "6" symbol ready-to-lose effect is executed. This lower "6" symbol ready-to-win effect indicates that the result of the lower "6" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(B) is lost. That is, in the lower stage "6" symbol reach-losing effect shown in FIG. 71(C), the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped, and as a result of the fluctuation, the upper and lower 2 rows of losing symbol arrays are shown. In this example, the losing pattern array shows "587" on the upper line JL and "676" indicating the reach-losing state on the lower line GL.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 71(B), as shown in FIG. 71(D), the lower "7" symbol ready-to-win effect may be executed. This lower "7" symbol ready-to-win effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. That is, in the lower stage "7" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(D), the symbol arrangement is shown in upper and lower two stages. "77" indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), the display screen 7a executes a "7" symbol jackpot determination effect. This "7" symbol jackpot confirmation effect is an effect performed after the lower "7" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(D) is performed. This "7" symbol jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the lower "7" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(D) is a big win. In the "7" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71(E), the jackpot pattern array "777" is displayed alone (one row) substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. At the upper part, the characters "big win~!" are displayed. By this "7" symbol jackpot finalizing performance, the player is convinced that the "7" symbol wins the jackpot.

Furthermore, instead of FIGS. 71(B) and 71(D), as shown in FIG. 71(F), there is a case where the upper "8" symbol ready-to-win effect is executed. This upper "8" symbol ready-to-win effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. That is, in the upper row "8" symbol ready-to-reach effect shown in FIG. 71(F), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R indicate the ready-to-reach state on the upper line JL. "88" is displayed, and "97" is displayed on the lower line GL.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), the "8" symbol jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This "8" symbol jackpot confirmation effect is an effect performed after the upper "8" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(F) is performed. This "8" symbol jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the upper "8" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(F) is a big hit. In the "8" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71(G), the jackpot pattern array "888" is displayed alone (one row) substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. At the upper part, the characters "big win~!" are displayed. By this "8" symbol jackpot determination performance, the player is convinced that the "8" symbol has won the jackpot.

It should be noted that the above-described lower "6" symbol ready-to-win performance shown in FIG. 71(E) and (G), there may be a case where the "6" symbol jackpot determination effect is performed with a predetermined probability. In addition, the "7" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71(E) described above is not necessarily performed even when the lower "7" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(D) is performed. However, as in FIG. 71(C), there may be a case where the lower row "7" symbol ready-to-lose effect is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the big hit confirmation production is performed is higher than the case where the lower "6" symbol ready-to-win production shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed. is higher in the case of
In addition, the "8" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71(G) described above is always performed even when the upper "8" symbol ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 71(F) is performed. However, as in FIG. 71(C), there may be a case where the upper row "8" symbol reach-losing effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Also, although illustration is omitted, even when the ready-to-win effect is performed with symbols other than the "8" symbol on the upper line JL, the big hit confirmation effect is performed with a predetermined probability, as in FIG. 71(G). It is possible that However, the probability that the big hit confirmation effect is performed is higher than the case where the ready-to-win effect is performed with symbols other than the “8” symbol on the upper line JL. is higher in the case of

That is, in the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 71, a plurality of left decorative patterns 8L and right decorative patterns 8R are stopped in a predetermined variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a plurality of pattern arrangement lines (main) are stopped at the same time. In this example, the upper line JL and the lower line GL) can be displayed, and when a predetermined left decorative pattern 8L and a right decorative pattern 8R stop on a predetermined pattern arrangement line among the plurality of pattern arrangement lines (in this example, , reach with "88" symbols on the upper line JL and reach with "77" symbols on the lower line GL), the predetermined variation is likely to result in a big win. That is, in the decorative pattern big win suggesting effect D, the expectation of a big win is high when reaching a predetermined pattern arrangement line on a predetermined pattern arrangement line. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, if the variation results in a big win, a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.) is given to a predetermined pattern array line as a jackpot suggestion effect. It is designed to perform reach production with pattern arrangement.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are stopped at a specified stop position, and when they are shifted from the specified stop position and stopped. Therefore, when the machine stops at a deviation from the prescribed stop position, it is easier to get a big hit in the variation related to the holding after the predetermined fluctuation than when it stops at the prescribed stop position. According to this configuration, the player can approach the game with high expectations when any of the decorative symbols is displaced from the prescribed stop position. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, by associating the deviated decorative pattern with the degree of expectation for big win, it is also possible to change the degree of expectation for big win depending on the type of deviated decorative pattern.

[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern, and the decorative patterns are stopped at a prescribed stop position. In this case, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped in a row, and when the decorative patterns are stopped with deviation from the prescribed stop position, the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are stopped. Either one of the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern is shifted from the line and stopped. According to this configuration, it is possible to display the decorative symbols in various manners in an easy-to-understand manner for the player when the decorative symbols are deviated from the prescribed stop position and stopped. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect productions in relation to the stoppage of the decorative symbols, and the rate of granting the jackpot to the player depends on the effect production. It has a structure that changes depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player goes through joys and sorrows every time the effect performance is performed, and can approach the game with high expectations when the effect performance with high expectations for a big win is performed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the decorative symbols include a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol. It is possible to display a plurality of pattern arrangement lines at the same time by stopping after the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern and stopping a plurality of the first decorative patterns and the second decorative patterns in a predetermined variation of the decorative patterns. When predetermined first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols are stopped on predetermined pattern array lines among the plurality of symbol array lines, the predetermined variation is likely to result in a big win. According to this configuration, when the predetermined first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop on the predetermined pattern arrangement line, the degree of expectation for the big win increases for the player, and the third pattern that stops after that increases. It is possible to observe with great anticipation while the decoration pattern changes. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the plurality of pattern arrangement lines are displayed in steps, and the first decorative pattern is placed on a predetermined step of the plurality of pattern arrangement lines displayed in steps. And when the second decorative pattern stops and the ready-to-win state is achieved in a predetermined pattern arrangement, the predetermined variation is likely to result in a big win. According to this configuration, when the player achieves a ready-to-win with a predetermined pattern arrangement on a predetermined pattern arrangement line, the degree of expectation for a big win becomes extremely high, and the third decorative pattern that stops after that is fluctuating. , can be watched with sustained high anticipation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, it is also possible to associate the ready-to-win symbols and the degree of expectation for big wins in the predetermined pattern arrangement line, and to change the degree of expectation for big wins according to the type of ready-to-win symbols.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the upper line JL and the lower line GL are shown as the prescribed stop positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. is not limited to this. For example, the specified stop positions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be three stages of the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line, or four or more stages above and below. Furthermore, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are horizontally scrolled, a plurality of vertical lines (left line, middle line and right line) in the horizontal direction may be defined as the prescribed stop positions.
As shown in FIG. 71, the pattern arrangement lines are two lines, the upper line JL and the lower line GL. , 4 or more vertical lines may be used. Furthermore, when there are three or more upper and lower pattern arrangement lines, a diagonal pattern arrangement line may be provided in addition to this (for example, in the case of three upper and lower lines, two diagonal pattern arrangement lines, one upward to the right and one downward to the right) may be provided. array line). Furthermore, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are horizontally scrolled, a plurality of vertical pattern arrangement lines (for example, left pattern arrangement line, middle pattern arrangement line, and right pattern arrangement line) are provided in the horizontal direction. can be

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the pattern arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shifted and stopped from the prescribed stop position is stopped at the prescribed stop position. Although the pattern arrangement is a jackpot pattern arrangement, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pattern arrangement that deviates from the prescribed stop position and stops may be a specific loose pattern or a ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Furthermore, in the case of a symbol arrangement that has shifted and stopped, if it is a pattern arrangement that will become a big hit pattern arrangement if it stops at a prescribed stop position, if a big win is made in the hold after that, the pattern arrangement that has shifted and stopped A jackpot pattern arrangement may be displayed with the same pattern arrangement. With this configuration, not only the big win but also the big win pattern arrangement can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine in advance whether or not the current big win is a probability variable big win.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deviated from the prescribed stop positions and stopped, a blue effect effect or a red effect effect using a color is performed. Although the jackpot grant rate is changed according to the type of effect presentation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more colors may be used for the effect production, and the jackpot grant rate may be changed depending on the difference in these colors. Alternatively, the effect production may use a plurality of types of characters in place of colors, and the jackpot award rate may be changed according to the types of these characters. Of course, effects may be produced by using both colors and characters. Furthermore, the effect production uses a blue effect image imitating water droplets and a red effect image imitating flames, but these water droplets and flames are not particularly limited, and any image can be used as the effect image. (However, it is preferable to use an image that gives the impression of a specific color.)

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R deviate from the prescribed stop positions and stop, a battle effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Although the jackpot is suggested, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the battle presentation, a story presentation may be performed, and the content of the story presentation may suggest a big win. In this case, depending on the type of the misaligned pattern arrangement, the rate of becoming ready-to-win in the subsequent hold, the rate of development to story presentation after ready-to-win, and the content of story presentation (expectation for big win) may be changed. By constructing in this way, one effect of displaying a displaced pattern arrangement simultaneously suggests a plurality of game indicators such as the reach rate in the subsequent hold, the story effect development rate, and the degree of expectation for a big win in the story effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, left decorative symbols 8L and right decorative symbols are displayed on predetermined pattern array lines among a plurality of symbol array lines. By stopping 8R and displaying a predetermined ready-to-win pattern, it is suggested that the predetermined variation is likely to result in a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped on a predetermined pattern arrangement line and a specific loose pattern other than a ready-to-win pattern is displayed, the predetermined variation may suggest that the big win is likely to occur. good. In this case, after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the loose stitches, the so-called pseudo-continuation is performed in which the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are changed again, and then the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged on a predetermined pattern arrangement line. A predetermined ready-to-win symbol may be displayed by stopping the right decorative symbol 8R. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.
Pseudo-continuation is an effect that makes it appear that the variable display of the decorative symbols continues a predetermined number of times in a pseudo manner, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of the variation, during the ready-to-win effect, or the like. For example, the pseudo-continuation is an effect that repeats the effect of starting to change and temporarily stops the decorative symbols, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols, and a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT). It includes an effect of repeating a temporary stop effect, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-continuation such as "x2", "x3", "pseudo", and an effect of executing a variable effect of decorative symbols. Note that the number of repeated effects is also called the number of pseudo-runs, and can be expressed as "pseudo-2" and "x2" for two times, and "pseudo-3" and "x3" for three times.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
A gaming machine comprising
In the predetermined variation of the decorative design by the decorative design display means, the decorative design may be stopped at a prescribed stop position or may be stopped at a deviation from the prescribed stop position,
When the game is stopped with a deviation from the specified stop position, the player is more likely to be given a benefit that is advantageous to the player in the change related to the hold after the predetermined change, compared to when the game is stopped at the specified stop position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-2]
The decorative design has a first decorative design, a second decorative design and a third decorative design,
The decorative pattern display means includes:
When the decorative pattern is stopped at the prescribed stop position, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are stopped in a row,
When the decorative patterns are stopped by being displaced from the prescribed stop position, any one of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern is displaced from the line and stopped. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-3]
Equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a plurality of types of effect effects in relation to the stoppage of the decorative symbols as one effect out of the plurality of display effects,
The rate at which advantageous benefits are given to the player varies depending on the type of effect production.
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2, characterized by:
[Aspect A6-4]
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The decorative design has a first decorative design, a second decorative design, and a third decorative design, and the third decorative design is higher than the first decorative design and the second decorative design. shall stop after
The decorative pattern display means is capable of displaying a plurality of pattern arrangement lines at the same time by stopping a plurality of the first decorative patterns and the second decorative patterns in a predetermined variation,
When the predetermined first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop on a predetermined pattern array line among the plurality of pattern array lines, a privilege advantageous to the player is given in the predetermined variation. Cheap,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-5]
The plurality of pattern arrangement lines are displayed in steps,
When the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at a predetermined stage of the plurality of pattern arrangement lines displayed in a stepped pattern and the predetermined pattern arrangement reaches a ready-to-win state, the predetermined variation. It is easy to grant advantageous benefits to players in
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4, characterized by:

The decorative symbol superimposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. FIG. This decorative pattern superimposition effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol superimposition effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. FIG. In the decorative design superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a decorative design non-display effect in which the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not displayed is performed during the variable performance. executed. The decorative symbol non-display effect is the same as the decorative symbol disappearance effect of the decorative symbol variation effect A shown in FIG. 48(J). That is, before the decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 72(A), the effect of FIG. 48(A) to FIG. 48(I) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be performed. Note that the decorative design non-display effect of FIG. 72(A) is that the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not displayed. good. For example, an arbitrary special ready-to-win effect may be performed.

Next, the decorative symbol enlarged display effect shown in FIG. 72(B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are partially protruding from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative design 8C is the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. It is partially overlapped and displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a big win image superimposed display effect is executed. Specifically, the first big winning image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative pattern 8L, the second big winning image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the third big winning image MF3 is overlapped on the right decorative pattern 8R. Is displayed. The first big-win image MF1, the second big-win image MF2, and the third big-win image MF3 are images on which "big win" is written, respectively, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. It suggests that the jackpot is a combination of the symbols 8R. A middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on a part of the first big win image MF1, and a middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on a part of the third big win image MF3.

Next, a reduced decorative symbol display effect shown in FIG. 72(D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are each reduced and displayed. At this time, the first big win image MF1, the second big win image MF2, and the third big win image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the middle decorative design 8C does not overlap the first big winning image MF1, and the middle decorative design 8C does not overlap the third big winning image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 72(C) to FIG. 72(D), the state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps the first big winning image MF1 is changed to the state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the first big winning image MF1. Then, the state in which the middle decorative design 8C overlaps the third big winning image MF3 is changed to the state in which the middle decorative design 8C does not overlap the third big winning image MF3.

Next, the special big winning image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 72(E) is executed. Specifically, the first special big winning image MS1 is superimposed on the first big winning image MF1, the second special big winning image MS2 is superimposed on the second big winning image MF2, and the third special big winning image MF3 is superimposed on the third big winning image MF3. A jackpot image MS3 is displayed in an overlapping manner. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as "special jackpot", respectively, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, And, it suggests that the jackpot combined with the right decorative pattern 8R is special, that is, the probability variable jackpot. In other words, the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 suggest jackpot types. A second special big winning image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the first special big winning image MS1, and a second special big winning image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the third special big winning image MS3. The first special jackpot image MS1 is superimposed and displayed so that part of the first jackpot image MF1 is visible, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so that part of the second jackpot image MF2 is visible. , and the third special jackpot image MS3 is overlapped and displayed so that a part of the third jackpot image MF3 is visible.

[Decorative pattern superimposed effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol superimposition effect B differs from the decorative symbol superimposed effect A in the timing at which the big winning images MF1 to MF3 are displayed. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 73(A) is the same as the decorative symbol superimposed performance A of FIG. 72(A). Next, the big win image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73(B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are newly displayed from the state in which they are not displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the first big winning image MF1 is already superimposed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the second big winning image MF2 is superimposed on the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the third big winning image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative pattern 8R. is displayed. The first big-win image MF1, the second big-win image MF2, and the third big-win image MF3 are images on which "big win" is written, respectively, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. This suggests that the jackpot is a combination of 8R symbols. A middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on a part of the first big win image MF1, and a middle decorative pattern 8C is superimposed on a part of the third big win image MF3.

Next, the reduced decorative symbol display effect shown in FIG. 73(C) is executed. The reduced decorative symbol display effect of FIG. 73(C) is the same as the decorative symbol superimposed effect A of FIG. 72(D). Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are each reduced and displayed. At this time, the first big win image MF1, the second big win image MF2, and the third big win image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the middle decorative design 8C does not overlap the first big winning image MF1, and the middle decorative design 8C does not overlap the third big winning image MF3.

Next, the special big winning image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73(D) is executed. The special big winning image superimposed display effect of FIG. 73(D) is the same as the decorative symbol superimposed effect A of FIG. 72(E). Specifically, the first special big winning image MS1 is superimposed on the first big winning image MF1, the second special big winning image MS2 is superimposed on the second big winning image MF2, and the third special big winning image MF3 is superimposed on the third big winning image MF3. The jackpot image MS3 is displayed in an overlapping manner. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as "special jackpot", respectively, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, And, it suggests that the jackpot combined with the right decorative pattern 8R is special, that is, the probability variable jackpot. A second special big winning image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the first special big winning image MS1, and a second special big winning image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the third special big winning image MS3.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect C. FIG. In the decorative symbol superimposed effect C, the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3 are different from those of the decorative symbol superimposed effect A. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 74(A) is the same as the decorative symbol superimposed performance A of FIG. 72(A). The decorative symbol enlarged display effect of FIG. 74(B) is the same as the decorative symbol superimposed effect A of FIG. 72(B).

Next, the predetermined image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74(C) is executed. Specifically, the first image MF1 is superimposed on the left decorative design 8L, the second image MF2 is superimposed on the middle decorative design 8C, and the third image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative design 8R. . The first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are images in which "HELLO" is written. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a part of the first image MF1, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a part of the third image MF3.

Next, the reduced decorative symbol display effect shown in FIG. 74(D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are each reduced and displayed. At this time, the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the first image MF1, and the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the third image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 74(C) to FIG. 74(D), the state in which the central decorative pattern 8C overlaps the first image MF1 changes to the state in which the central decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the first image MF1. , the state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps the third image MF3 is changed to the state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the third image MF3.

Next, the special big winning image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74(E) is executed. Specifically, the special big winning image MS is displayed overlapping the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3. The special jackpot image MS is an image written as "special jackpot", and the jackpot combination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is special, that is, the variable jackpot. suggests that In other words, the special jackpot image MS suggests the jackpot type. The special jackpot image MS is displayed so as to overlap each of the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 so that a portion thereof can be visually recognized.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect D. FIG. The decorative symbol superimposition effect D is different from the decorative symbol superimposed effect A in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3 and the display conditions. First, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are lost and temporarily stopped during the variable effect is displayed. Next, the suggestive image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75(B) is executed. Specifically, the first suggestive image MF1 is superimposed on the left decorative design 8L, the second suggestive image MF2 is superimposed on the middle decorative design 8C, and the third suggestive image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative design 8R. Is displayed. The first suggestive image MF1, the second suggestive image MF2, and the third suggestive image MF3 are images in which "What if!", "No way!", and "!!!" This suggests that the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may not yet be confirmed display. The middle decorative design 8C may be displayed overlapping a portion of the first suggestive image MF1, or the middle decorative design 8C may be displayed overlapping a portion of the third suggestive image MF3.

Next, the special suggestive image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75(C) is executed. Specifically, the special suggestive image MS is displayed overlapping the first suggestive image MF1, the second suggestive image MF2, and the third suggestive image MF3. The special suggestive image MS is an image written with "no way!!!", and the possibility that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R being temporarily stopped and displayed are not confirmed display increases. suggesting that In other words, the special suggestion image MS suggests the start of the pseudo-continuous effect, and also suggests that the expectation of the big win has increased. The special suggestive image MS is superimposed and displayed such that a portion of each of the first suggestive image MF1, the second suggestive image MF2, and the third suggestive image MF3 is visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R which are being temporarily stopped are variably displayed again, and a pseudo continuous effect is executed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern superimposition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the left decorative symbol 8L is superimposed with the first big winning image MF1, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is superimposed with the second big winning image MF2. , a first effect in which a third big win image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative pattern 8R, and after the first effect, a first special big win image MS1 is superimposed and displayed on the first big win image MF1; A second performance in which a second special big winning image MS2 is superimposed on the big winning image MF2 and displayed and a third special big winning image MS3 is superimposed on the third big winning image MF3 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72(C) and 73(C), in the first effect, after the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping the third big win image MF3, 72(D), as shown in FIG. 73(D), the transition is made to a state in which the middle decorative pattern 8C does not overlap the third big winning image MF3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72(C) and 73(C), in the first effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping the first big win image MF1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72(E) and 73(E), in the second effect, the second special big winning image MS2 is superimposed on the first special big winning image MS1 and displayed, The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping the third special jackpot image MS3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72(E) and 73(E), in the second effect, the first special jackpot image MF1 is partially visible. The image MS1 is superimposed and displayed so that part of the second big win image MF2 is visible. The second special big win image MS2 is superimposed and displayed so that part of the third big win image MF3 is visible. A third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed in an overlapping manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72(E) and 73(E), in the second effect, a combination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R suggests a jackpot, and the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 indicate the type of jackpot. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern superimposition effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 72B to 72E, images other than the images exemplified above may be included. For example, in FIGS. 72(B) to 48(E), a right-handed image or the like may be displayed in addition to the decorative symbols. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative design,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern,
one of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image having the same content as the first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a third image having the same content as the first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image having content different from that of the first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a fifth image having the same content as the fourth image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a sixth image having the same content as the fourth image;
The first image is superimposed on the first decorative design, the second image is superimposed on the second decorative design, and the third image is superimposed on the third decorative design. a first effect displayed by
After the first effect, the fourth image is superimposed on the first image, the fifth image is superimposed on the second image, and the third image is superimposed on the third image. and a second effect in which 6 images are superimposed and displayed.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
In the first effect, after the second decorative pattern is displayed overlapping the third image, a transition is made to a state in which the second decorative pattern does not overlap the third image. game machine.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap the first image.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
In the second effect, the fifth image is displayed overlapping the fourth image, and the fifth image is displayed overlapping the sixth image.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 and A7-4,
In the second effect, the fourth image is superimposed and displayed so that part of the first image is visible, and the second image is displayed so that part of the second image is visible. 5 images are superimposed and displayed, and the sixth image is superimposed and displayed so that part of the third image is visible.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
In the second effect, the combination of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern suggests a big win, and the fourth image and the fifth and the sixth image suggest a type of jackpot.

The jackpot background display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. FIG. This jackpot background display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols, during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the jackpot background display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Jackpot background display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect A. FIG.
This big win background display effect A is an effect executed when the big win pattern array is displayed after the ready-to-win effect. In this big win background display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a big win time effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot time production 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot pattern array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "6" patterns. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. This jackpot pattern array of "6" patterns is a jackpot pattern array in which it cannot be determined whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the variable probability state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a big win effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot time production 2, a background image HK2 (crosshatched portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot pattern array A81. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed within the background image HK2 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged within the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), a big win effect 3 is executed. In this big win production 3, the big win pattern array A81 changes again on the background image HK2.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a big win effect 4 is executed. In this big win production 4, the big win pattern array A81 is again displayed on the background image HK2. This jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are doubles of "7" patterns. This jackpot pattern array A81 is a jackpot pattern array different from the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of jackpot performance 2, and is a jackpot pattern array suggesting that the game state after the jackpot will be in a definite variable state.

It should be noted that the big win pattern array A81 displayed in the big win production 4 is a big win pattern arrangement different from the big win pattern arrangement A81 in the big win production 2, suggesting that the game state after the big win becomes a variable state. Although it is a jackpot pattern array, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot pattern array as the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of the jackpot time production 2. - 特許庁

[Jackpot background display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect B. FIG.
This big win background display effect B is an effect executed when the big win pattern array is displayed after the ready-to-win effect. In this big win background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a big win time effect 1 is executed. In this big win performance 1, a background image HK1 and a big win pattern array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "6" patterns. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. This jackpot pattern array of "6" patterns is a jackpot pattern array in which it cannot be determined whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the variable probability state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the big win effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot time production 2, a background image HK2 (cross-hatched portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot pattern array A81. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed within the background image HK2 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged within the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a big win effect 3 is executed. In this big win production 3, the big win pattern array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Also, in this big hit time production 3, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a big win effect 4 is executed. In this big win effect 4, when the player presses the effect button 63, the big win pattern array A81 is again displayed on the background image HK2. This jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are doubles of "7" patterns. This jackpot pattern array A81 is a jackpot pattern array different from the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of jackpot performance 2, and is a jackpot pattern array suggesting that the game state after the jackpot will be in a definite variable state.

It should be noted that the big win pattern array A81 displayed in the big win production 4 is a big win pattern arrangement different from the big win pattern arrangement A81 in the big win production 2, suggesting that the game state after the big win becomes a variable state. Although it is a jackpot pattern array, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot pattern array as the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of the jackpot time production 2. - 特許庁

[Jackpot background display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect C. FIG.
This big win background display effect C is an effect executed when the big win pattern array is displayed after the ready-to-win effect. In this big win background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a big win time effect 1 is executed. In this big win performance 1, a background image HK1 and a big win pattern array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are doubles of "6" patterns. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. This "6" symbol jackpot pattern array is a jackpot pattern array in which it cannot be determined whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the variable probability state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a big win effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot time production 2, a background image HK2 (cross-hatched portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot pattern array A81. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed within the background image HK2 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged within the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is larger than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a big win effect 3 is executed. In this big win production 3, the big win pattern array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Also, in this big hit time production 3, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a big win effect 4 is executed. In this big win effect 4, when the player presses the effect button 63, the big win pattern array A81 is again displayed on the background image HK2. This jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are doubles of "7" patterns. This jackpot pattern array A81 is a jackpot pattern array different from the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of jackpot performance 2, and is a jackpot pattern array suggesting that the game state after the jackpot will be in a definite variable state.

It should be noted that the big win pattern array A81 displayed in the big win production 4 is a big win pattern arrangement different from the big win pattern arrangement A81 in the big win production 2, suggesting that the game state after the big win becomes a variable state. Although it is a jackpot pattern array, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot pattern array as the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of the jackpot time production 2. - 特許庁

[Jackpot background display effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect D. FIG.
This big win background display effect D is an effect executed when the big win pattern array is displayed after the ready-to-win effect. In this big win background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a big win time effect 1 is executed. In this big win performance 1, a background image HK1 and a big win pattern array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "6" patterns. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. This jackpot pattern array of "6" patterns is a jackpot pattern array in which it cannot be determined whether the game state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the variable probability state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a big win effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot time production 2, a background image HK2 (cross-hatched portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot pattern array A81. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed within the background image HK2 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged within the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a big win effect 3 is executed. In this big win production 3, the big win pattern array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Also, in this big hit time production 3, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a big win effect 4 is executed. In this big win effect 4, when the player presses the effect button 63, the big win pattern array A81 is again displayed on the background image HK2. This jackpot pattern array A81 is composed of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are doubles of "7" patterns. This jackpot pattern array A81 is a jackpot pattern array different from the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of jackpot performance 2, and is a jackpot pattern array suggesting that the game state after the jackpot will be in a definite variable state.

It should be noted that the big win pattern array A81 displayed in the big win production 4 is a big win pattern arrangement different from the big win pattern arrangement A81 in the big win production 2, suggesting that the game state after the big win becomes a variable state. Although it is a jackpot pattern array, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot pattern array as the jackpot pattern array A81 at the time of the jackpot time production 2. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a jackpot effect 5 is executed. In this big win effect 5, the background image HK2 is erased and the big win pattern array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Also, the display position of the big win pattern array A81 moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and is displayed larger than in the big win production 4. - 特許庁

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the jackpot background display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the background image HK1 is displayed in the jackpot background display effect, and when the background image HK1 is displayed, the jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed, and the jackpot pattern array A81 is the background image HK1. When the background image HK1 is displayed after the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in front, the background image HK2 is displayed, and the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1. , and when the background image HK2 is displayed, the big win pattern array A81 is displayed, and the big win pattern array A81 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. According to this configuration, at the time of the big win, the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1, and the big win pattern array A81 is displayed in front of this background image HK2, so that the background image HK1 has a predetermined effect. While performing, the jackpot pattern array A81 can be emphasized. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance of the background image HK1 and enjoy the joy of the jackpot pattern array A81. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the boundary line KL is provided between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 in the big win background display effect. According to this configuration, since the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 becomes clear, the player can clearly distinguish between the effect performed by the background image HK1 and the display of the big win pattern array A81. can. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance of the background image HK1 and enjoy the joy of the jackpot pattern array A81. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1 in the jackpot background display effects A, B, and D. According to this configuration, even when the jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed, the predetermined effect in the background image HK1 can be meaningfully enjoyed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the big win background display effect, the big win pattern arrangement A81 displayed in the big win effect 2 is a big win pattern arrangement in which it is not possible to determine whether the game state after the big win game is the normal state or the probability variable state. , and the jackpot pattern array A81 displayed in the jackpot time production 4 is a jackpot pattern array different from the jackpot pattern array A81 in the jackpot time production 2, suggesting that the game state after the jackpot will be in a definite variable state. It is a jackpot pattern arrangement. In both the big win performance 2 and the big win performance 4, the big win pattern array A81 is performed in an area in front of the background image HK2 where the background image HK2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the re-lottery effect of changing from the jackpot pattern arrangement suggesting that the player is relatively disadvantageous to the jackpot pattern arrangement that suggests that the player is relatively advantageous is displayed in front of the background image HK1. Since the displayed background image HK2 can be used as the background, this re-lottery effect can impress the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect D, the background image HK2 is erased after the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot pattern array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, the jackpot pattern array A81 can be emphasized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the big win background display effect, the big win pattern array A81 in the big win effect 1 and the big win effect 2 is a pattern arrangement using the same pattern. According to this configuration, the jackpot pattern array A81 can be emphasized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative symbol variation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the big win background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the big win pattern array A81 may be different between the big win effect 1 and the big win effect 2. - 特許庁

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the position of the background image HK2 may be the upper left, lower left, lower right, or center of the background image HK1. Also, the gaming machine 1 may include a display device different from the image display device 7 . Then, the background image HK1 may be displayed on a display device different from the image display device 7, and the background image HK2 may be displayed on the display device.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot background display effect B of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image BTN may have a plurality of patterns of display modes (for example, colors and patterns). In this case, the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on the display mode of the button image BTN. In addition, when the button image BTN is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which there are a plurality of patterns of how to illuminate the production button 63 . In this case, the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on how the effect button 63 is illuminated.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first background image,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a first jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot,
The third display effect is a effect of displaying a second background image,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a second jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the first big win is performed in the second display effect. The pattern array is displayed in front of the first background image in the first display effect, and when the first display effect is being performed after the second display effect is performed. The third display effect is performed, the second background image in the third display effect is arranged in front of the first background image in the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed. is performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and the second jackpot pattern array in the fourth display effect is positioned in front of the second background image in the third display effect. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
When the second background image is arranged in front of the first background image, a predetermined line is arranged on the boundary between the second background image and the first background image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
When the second background image is arranged in the first background image, the area where the second background image is displayed is smaller than the area where the first background image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of changing the second jackpot pattern array to a third jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot,
The jackpot represented by the third jackpot pattern array is a jackpot more advantageous to the player than the jackpot represented by the second jackpot pattern array,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect is a region in which the second background image of the third display effect is displayed. is performed at
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-4,
In the combination effect, the display of the second background image in the third display effect is terminated after the fifth display effect, and then the third jackpot pattern array is displayed in the first background image. displayed in front of
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 5,
The first jackpot pattern array and the second jackpot pattern array are the same pattern array,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The plural timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. FIG. This multi-timer effect can be executed, for example, during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute multiple timer effects is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Multi-timer effect A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect A. FIG. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 80A to 80J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multi-timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a variable effect of decorative symbols is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 80(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images with a two-digit digital display inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown (here, " 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation accepting period (operable period) of the operating unit starts or a point in time when the operation accepting period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display/countdown effect shown in FIGS. 80(C) and 80(D) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "30" at the time of display, and then starts counting down (starts). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started (not counting down) at the time of display, and random numbers are displayed. Random number display here means that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1.

After the random number display/countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 80(E). When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Here, while the remaining period of the first timer IM1 is displaying "28", the second timer TM2 displays "10" as the remaining period after displaying the random number, and then starts counting down. be. The second timer TM2 slows down the switching speed of the numerical value at the start of the countdown. This allows the player to recognize that the countdown has started.

After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (starting), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 each count down for a while as shown in FIG. ). After that, as shown in FIG. 80(G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. 80(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 80(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 with the words "Geki Atsushi!" An expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Multi-timer effect B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect B. FIG. The multiple timer effect B differs from the multiple timer effect A in the number of displayed timer images and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 81(A) to 81(J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multi-timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the first timer TM1 is displayed while the variable effect of decorative symbols is executed. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image. ” seconds). When the first timer TM1 is displayed, "100" is displayed as the remaining period, and then countdown is started (started). As in the multi-timer effect A, the certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and the display does not necessarily need to change in some way when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation accepting period (operable period) of the operating unit starts or a point in time when the operation accepting period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81B, while the first timer TM1 is being displayed, the second timer TM2 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a three-digit digital display timer image, which is not started (countdown is not started) when displayed, and is displayed with random numbers. Random number display here means that numerical values between "000" and "999" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1. The first timer TM1 continues to count down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are being displayed. The third timer TM3 is a three-digit digital display timer image, and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, while the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "60" and the countdown is started (started). Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining periods displayed by the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays "55" and the remaining period of the third timer IM3 displays "55", the second timer TM2 displays the remaining period after displaying the random number. "10" is displayed as the period of time, and then the countdown is started. The second timer TM2 slows down the switching speed of the numerical value at the start of the countdown. This allows the player to recognize that the countdown has started.

After each of the three timers TM1 to TM3 counts down, as shown in FIG. 81(E), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. 81(F) , the first degree of expectation suggestion effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. 81(H), the third expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the third expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (0), the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third timer TM3 is displayed at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. An expectation level suggestion image EI3 is displayed. Here, the content of the third expectation level suggesting image EI3 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 81(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first and third expectation suggesting effects, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 with the words "Geki Atsushi!" An expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1 and the third expectation level suggesting image EI3.

[Multi-timer effect C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect C. FIG. The multiple-timer effect C differs from the multiple-timer effect A in the structure of the timer image and the display contents of the timer image before starting. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 82(A) to 82(J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multiple timer effect C, first, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 82(A) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 have a frame image formed around the two-digit digital display, with an "ON" or "OFF" display next to the frame image. The shutter of the second timer TM2 is closed so that the digital display cannot be seen. "ON" and "OFF" shown next to the frame images of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate whether or not the shutter is open. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 count down to display the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from "01" to "99") until reaching a certain point. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation accepting period (operable period) of the operating unit starts or a point in time when the operation accepting period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 82(B) and 82(C), the first timer countdown effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "30" at the time of display, and then starts counting down (starts). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started (the countdown is not yet started) and the shutter is closed during display. Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), when the shutter of the second timer TM2 opens, the digital display "10" becomes visible. That is, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 82(E), the second timer TM2 countdown is started (started).

After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (starting), for a while, as shown in FIG. ). After that, as shown in FIG. 82(G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 82(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 82(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Multi-timer effect D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect D. FIG. The multi-timer effect D differs from the multi-timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 83A to 83J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multiple timer effect D, first, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 83(A) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are bar-shaped meters, and indicate the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate that the remaining period of time is getting shorter as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and that a certain point has been reached by the remaining amount of the meter running out (becoming zero). Suggest. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the first timer start effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed when the meter is full, and then the meter remaining amount starts to decrease (starts). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display, and the meter does not decrease. Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are being displayed. The third timer TM3 is a bar-shaped meter, and indicates the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. When the third timer TM3 is displayed, a remaining amount less than the remaining amount of the meter of the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, the decrease in the meter remaining amount is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), the second timer TM2 is started. That is, the second timer TM2 starts to decrease the meter remaining amount. Immediately after the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining amount that is less than the remaining amount on the meter of the first timer TM1 and greater than the remaining amount on the meter of the third timer TM3 is displayed. Then, the decrease in the meter remaining amount is started. After that, for a while, the meter remaining amount decreases in each of the three timers. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(E), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the third expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the third expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third timer TM3 is displayed at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. 3 Expectation level suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. . In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and "Heat!!" is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A first degree-of-expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the content of the first expectation level suggesting image EI1 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the third expectation level suggesting image EI3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 83(J), the second expectation suggestion effect is performed. . In the second expectation suggesting effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation) of a big win is displayed in the variation during the change effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "Gekiatsu!" A second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggestive image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation level suggestive image EI1 and the third expectation level suggestive image EI3.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multiple timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80(B)(C), 81(B)(C), 82(B)(C) and 83(B)(C), A first timer TM1 and a second timer TM2 are displayed on the screen 7a. , FIG. 81(D), FIG. 82(D), and FIG. 83(D), after the first effect, the second timer TM2 starts and the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 and a second effect in which the second timer TM2 displays a remaining period that is shorter than the current period. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80(B)(C), 81(B)(C), and 82(B)(C), in the first effect, the second timer TM2 , a random number is displayed on the digital display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80(G), (H), FIGS. 81(G), (H), FIGS. After the effect of 2, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 disappears while the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, and the second timer TM2 is displayed at the position where the first expectation degree is displayed. A third effect in which the suggestive image EI1 is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80(I)(J), 81(I)(J), 82(I)(J), and 83(I)(J), After the effect of 3, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 disappears, and a fourth effect in which the second expectation suggesting image EI2 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed can be executed. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80(H)(J), 81(H)(J), 82(H)(J), and 83(H)(J), The 1st effect, the 2nd effect, the 3rd effect, and the 4th effect are executed during the variable effect, and are the first expectation suggesting image EI1 and the second expectation suggesting image. EI2 is a suggestive image that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80(H)(J), 81(H)(J), 82(H)(J), and 83(H)(J), There is a case where the expectation level of the jackpot suggested by the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is higher than the expectation level of the jackpot suggested by the first expectation level suggestion image EI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the multi-timer effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80(J)), the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1. However, the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 may display content with a lower level of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1, or may display contents with the same level of expectation. In addition, in FIG. 81 (J), the second expectation suggestive image EI2 is assumed to display content with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation suggestive image EI1 and the third expectation suggestive image EI31. . However, the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 may display content with a lower level of expectation for a big win than at least one of the first expectation level suggesting image EI1 and the third expectation level suggesting image EI3, or may have the same level of expectation. Content may be displayed.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80), when the remaining periods of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 become "0", the expectations suggestive images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expectation level suggesting image may be displayed. For example, an image of the operating part may be displayed, or an image in which the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner are displayed in a static manner may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80(B)), the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1. However, the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 may be the same as the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1, or may be slower. Further, the second timer TM2 may be stopped while displaying a specific numerical value instead of displaying a random number.
[Modification 4]
As described above (eg, FIG. 80), the timer may include other graphical elements in addition to a time-varying portion (eg, a digital display portion). For example, the timer may be a digitally displayed image in the middle of the triangle image. In this case, the triangular image portion also corresponds to the timer. An image in which the digital display portion becomes temporarily difficult to see also corresponds to the timer.
[Modification 5]
The above timer speed effect is assumed to be executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed across multiple variations.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating the remaining period until reaching a certain point;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period of time until reaching a point in time;
a first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, and the first timer is started while the second timer is not started;
a second effect in which the second timer is started after the first effect and the second timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the first timer; A game machine characterized by being capable of executing
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The second timer indicates the remaining period by a digital display countdown,
The gaming machine, wherein in the first effect, the second timer displays a random number on the digital display.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first predetermined image;
After the second effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer disappears while the first timer indicates the remaining period, and the second timer returns to the position where it was displayed. , a gaming machine capable of executing a third effect in which the first predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second predetermined image;
After the third effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer expires, and a fourth effect is executed in which the second predetermined image is displayed at the position where the first timer was displayed. A game machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-4,
The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are executed during the variable effect,
The gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are suggestive images suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
A gaming machine, wherein the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the second predetermined image may be higher than the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the first predetermined image.

The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. This timer effect can be executed in relation to the variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). For example, at the start of variable display of special symbols, at the start of variable performance of decorative symbols, during reach performance (super reach performance), etc., it can be executed.

[Timer effect A]
84 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A. FIG.
In the timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed. This timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. The middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 84(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
Also, in the lower portion of the display screen 7a, a battle effect is executed in which an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. This battle effect is a effect for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the timer effect impossibility suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect impossibility suggesting effect, a large character "Lost!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to indicate that the ally character CRA has been defeated as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84(A). By displaying the characters "lost!", it is suggested that the timer effect will not be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R shown in FIG. 84(A) are lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern arrangement.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 84(B), as shown in FIG. 68(D), there is a case where a timer effect possible suggesting effect is executed. As a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84(A), this timer effect suggesting effect indicates that the ally character CRA has won, and the words "Victory!" By displaying the characters "Victory!", it is suggested that the timer effect will be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 84(A). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 84(E) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), a timer stop ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. It has become. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), the display screen 7a executes a big win expectation degree suggesting effect. This jackpot expectation suggesting effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this performance indicating the degree of expectation of a big win, the timer image TM is erased, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined degree of expectation of a big win is suggested at the center of the display screen 7a. Directing DKE is performed. Note that this jackpot expectation degree suggesting effect DKE is not particularly limited, and may be any effect such as a battle effect, a story effect, etc., as long as it is a effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the ready-to-win result shown in FIGS. 84(F) and (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot pattern array "777" indicated by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.
It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 84(E) is not always performed, and there may be a case where the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 84(C) is performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the timer effect A shown in FIG. 84, a timer effect execution enable/disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect, and as a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. , a timer effect is performed as the second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down and reaches "0" in the timer effect, that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (timer effect ends), suggesting the expectation of the big win as the third effect. Then, a jackpot expectation degree suggesting effect DKE is performed.

[Timer effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining timer effect B. FIG.
In the timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed. This timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. The middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 85(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
Also, in the lower portion of the display screen 7a, a battle effect is executed in which an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. This battle effect is a effect for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), an effect suggesting that a timer effect is possible is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 85(A), this timer effect suggesting effect indicates that the ally character CRA has won, and the words "Victory!" By displaying the characters "victory!", it is suggested that the timer effect will be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 85(A). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 85(C) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a timer stop ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. It has become. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and predetermined characters MKE are displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win of the change, and in FIG. 85(E), the character MKE of "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the ready-to-win result shown in FIG. 85(E) is lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern array. That is, the lost pattern array "958" indicated by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 85(E), as shown in FIG. 85(G), a character display effect may be executed. This character display effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and predetermined characters MKE are displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for the big win of the change, and in FIG. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the ready-to-win result shown in FIG. 85(G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot pattern array "777" indicated by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance.
It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 85(H) is not always performed, and there may be a case where the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85(F) is performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85(F) described above is not always performed, and there may be a case where the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 85(H) is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot determination effect is performed is higher when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85(G) is performed than when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85(E) is performed. there is

That is, in the timer effect B shown in FIG. 85, a timer effect execution enable/disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect, and as a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. , a timer effect is performed as a second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down and reaches "0" in the timer effect, that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (timer effect ends), suggesting the expectation of the big win as the third effect. A character display effect is performed. Predetermined characters MKE are displayed in the character display effect, and the content of the displayed predetermined characters MKE suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, the character display effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, and the degree of expectation for a big win is changed according to the contents of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C. FIG.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed. This timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. The middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 86(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).
Also, in the lower portion of the display screen 7a, a battle effect is executed in which an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. This battle effect is a effect for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. The production is not executed.

When the ally character CRA wins the battle effect in the timer effect execution possibility effect shown in FIG. 86(A), next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, a timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 86(B) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), a timer stop ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. It has become. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and predetermined characters MKE are displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win of the change, and in FIG. 86(D), the character MKE of "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. be done.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86(D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. be done.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 86(B), as shown in FIG. 86(E), there is a case where the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. This decorative pattern variation is an effect performed after the ally character CRA wins the battle effect in the timer effect execution possibility effect shown in FIG. 86(A). In this decorative symbol variation effect, only the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and the timer image TM is not yet displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 86(E) is an image in which the battle effect is erased in the timer effect execution enable/disable effect shown in FIG. 86(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), a timer display ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer display ready-to-win production is performed when the left decorative design 8L and right decorative design 8R are stopped in the ready-to-reach design arrangement in the decorative design fluctuation production shown in FIG. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the ready-to-win pattern arrangement was stopped (before the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped), a timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 86(F) shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value. That is, in the timer display ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 86(E), the display timing of the timer image TM is when or after the ready-to-win state is established by the fluctuation, and is later than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86(B). In addition, the timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), a timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86(F) is counted down to 0 seconds, a predetermined ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect) RE is performed. . In this timer stop effect, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right corner. It has become. Note that the predetermined ready-to-reach effect (super ready-to-reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), a character display effect is executed. This character display effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and predetermined characters MKE are displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win of the change, and in FIG. Is displayed.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86(H) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. be.
It should be noted that the big hit determination effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86(H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the losing symbol stop effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the losing symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86(D) described above is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the big win confirmation effect is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the big hit confirmation effect is performed is higher when the timer display ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 86(F) is performed than the timer display effect shown in FIG. It is higher when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86(H) is performed than when the character display effect shown in D) is performed.

That is, in the timer effect C shown in FIG. 86, a timer effect execution enable/disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect, and as a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. , a timer effect is performed as a second effect. Here, in the timer effect, the later the display timing of the timer image TM is, and the longer the timer initial value of the timer image TM is, the higher the expectation of the big win is. That is, the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM are effects suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win, and the difference in the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM indicates the degree of expectation for the big win. It is set to change. Then, when the timer value is counted down and reaches "0" in the timer effect, that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (timer effect ends), suggesting the expectation of the big win as the third effect. A character display effect is performed. Predetermined characters MKE are displayed in the character display effect, and the content of the displayed predetermined characters MKE suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, the character display effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win, and the degree of expectation for the big win is changed according to the content of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer effect D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D. FIG.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed. This timer effect execution enable/disable effect is executed in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols. The middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 87(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).
Also, in the lower portion of the display screen 7a, a battle effect is executed in which an image of a battle between the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. This battle effect is a effect for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. The production is not executed.

When the teammate character CRA wins the battle effect in the timer effect execution possibility effect shown in FIG. 87(A), next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 87(B) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a timer stop ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop ready-to-win production, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. It has become. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and predetermined characters MKE are displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win of the variation, and in FIG. 87(D), the character MKE of "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. be done.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 87(D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. be done.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 87(B), although illustration is omitted, when the timer effect execution enable/disable effect shown in FIG. 87(A) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. , the display screen 7a may execute a decorative symbol variation effect. In this decorative symbol variation effect, only the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and the timer image TM is not yet displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol variation effect is an image in which the battle effect is deleted by the timer effect execution enable/disable effect shown in FIG. 87(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), a timer W (double) display ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer W display ready-to-win effect is executed when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement in the decorative pattern fluctuation effect, or when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. When a predetermined time has passed since (before the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped), the timer image TM1 and the timer image TM2 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer images TM1 and TM2 are displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In FIG. 87E, the timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value, and the timer image TM2 shows 30 seconds as the timer initial value. That is, in the timer W display ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 86(E), the display timing of the timer images TM1 and TM2 is when or after the ready-to-win is established by the fluctuation, and the timer display effect shown in FIG. Furthermore, the timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), a timer TM2 stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer TM2 stop effect, a predetermined ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect) RE is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. there is At this time, the timer image TM1 similarly counts down to 20 seconds. In this timer TM2 stop effect, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect) RE is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. It's like Note that this predetermined ready-to-reach effect (super ready-to-reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), a timer TM two-character display effect is executed. This timer TM2 character display effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 stops at 0 seconds. In this timer TM2 character display presentation, the timer image TM2 is erased, and predetermined characters MKE are displayed instead of the erased timer image TM2. This predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win of the change, and in FIG. 87(E), the character MKE2 of "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM2 was displayed. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), a timer TM1 character display effect is executed. This timer TM1 character display effect is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM1 stops at 0 seconds. In this timer TM1 character display effect, the timer image TM1 is erased, and predetermined characters MKE1 are displayed instead of the erased timer image TM1. This predetermined character MKE1 is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win of the variation, and in FIG. Is displayed.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the timer TM 1-character display effect shown in FIG. 87(H) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. executed.
It should be noted that the big hit determination effect after the timer TM 1 character display effect shown in FIG. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 87(D) described above is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the big win confirmation effect is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the big win confirmation effect is performed is higher when the timer W display ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 87(E) is performed than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87(B). 87(G) and (H) are higher than the case where the character display effect shown in FIG. 87(D) is performed.

That is, in the timer effect D shown in FIG. 87, a timer effect execution enable/disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect, and as a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. , a timer effect is performed as the second effect. Here, in the timer effect, the later the display timing of the timer image TM, the longer the time of the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the greater the number of displayed timer images TM, the higher the expectation of the big win. . That is, the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the number of displayed timer images TM are effects suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win. Depending on the difference in the number of displayed timer images TM, the degree of expectation for a big win is changed. Then, when the timer value is counted down and reaches "0" in the timer effect, that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer images TM1 and TM2 are sequentially erased (timer effect ends), and a big win is expected as the third effect. A character display effect that suggests the degree is performed. Predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 are sequentially displayed in the character display effect, and the content of the displayed predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, the character display effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win, and the degree of expectation for the big win is changed according to the content of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, predetermined first effects, second effects, and third effects can be executed, and the first effect is displayed in the first mode. This is an effect including an effect and an effect displayed in a second mode. The second effect is a display of displaying a predetermined timer image, counting the timer value using the timer image, and displaying the timer value at the predetermined value. The third performance is a performance including a display to stop, the third performance is a performance including a display suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, and when the performance displayed in the first mode is performed in the first performance, the second performance is performed. When the timer value stops at a predetermined value in the second effect, the third effect is performed. According to this configuration, when the effect displayed in the first mode is performed in the first effect, and when the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value in the second effect and the third effect is performed. , you can face the game with great expectations. In addition, since it is determined whether or not to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win with a timer image in which the timer value visually changes with the lapse of time, the player can maintain the sense of expectation with the lapse of time. Also, by stopping the timer value at various numerical values, it is possible to make the player happy and sad. Furthermore, by associating the stopped timer value with the degree of expectation for the big win, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for the big win depending on the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the first effect is a battle effect in which the player's friend character and the enemy character battle each other, and the first mode is a battle effect. This is an effect in which the ally character wins, and the second mode is configured to be an effect in which the ally character is defeated in the battle effect. According to this configuration, a battle effect for determining whether or not to perform the second effect is performed, and when the player's teammate character wins in this battle effect, the second effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the decision whether or not to carry out the second effect in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the second effect is a countdown display to stop the timer value at a predetermined value, and the third effect is to stop the timer value at a predetermined value. It is a character effect in which a predetermined character is displayed when the game stops at , and the degree of expectation for a big hit is configured to change depending on the content of the characters displayed in the character effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for a big win by displaying characters of various contents in a character effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the contents of the displayed characters and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the degree of expectation for a big win is configured to change according to the display timing of the timer image in the second effect. According to this configuration, the timer image can be displayed at various timings to change the degree of expectation for the big win. As a result, the player can be happy and sad depending on the display timing of the timer image, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the degree of expectation for a big win is configured to change depending on the number of displayed timer images. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily change the degree of expectation for a big win by variously changing the number of timer images. As a result, the number of displayed timer images makes the player happy or sad, and the game can be more interesting.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the timer display effects are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer display effect may be such that the timer value changes irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value (0 seconds), a big win expectation indication effect is performed and a big win is made. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a predetermined value at which the timer value is stopped is associated with the jackpot expectation degree suggesting effect, and the jackpot expectation degree suggesting effect also suggests the type of the jackpot (for example, the type of the jackpot is a variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot with a different number of rounds). You may do so. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest not only the jackpot but also the type of the jackpot (jackpot pattern arrangement). It is possible to determine in advance whether or not there is a big hit with many wins.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, two timer images are displayed in the timer display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more timer images may be displayed. Also, the color scheme of the timer image may be different instead of the same color. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win even by the color scheme and the number of timer images. Also, two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may be displayed such that they are partially superimposed so that the timer values can be visually recognized. Furthermore, the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may not be displayed at the same time, and may be displayed with a time difference.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the characters indicating the degree of expectation for a big win displayed in the character display effect are of two types, ``Chance'' and ``Extreme heat''. , the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, there may be a plurality of types of characters such as "Fever", "NEXT", and "Big Win", which are displayed in the character display effect and indicate the degree of expectation for a big win. Also, in this case, the type of characters and the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern array) are associated, and the type of jackpot (for example, as the type of jackpot, a variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot with a different number of rounds) is also suggested. good too. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest not only the jackpot but also the type of the jackpot (jackpot pattern arrangement). It is possible to determine in advance whether or not there is a big hit with many wins. In addition, two characters (a plurality of characters) of "chance" and "extreme heat" may be displayed so as to be partially superimposed so that the characters can be visually recognized. Furthermore, the display of the character (a plurality of characters) may not be displayed at the same time, and the previously displayed character may be erased before the next character is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. Although the battle production is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, effects for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect include button effects (for example, when a meter is filled up by repeatedly pressing a button, or when a success is shown by pushing a button, etc.), , the effect of winning a lottery (for example, the effect of winning at roulette), or the effect of winning first place in a competition (for example, the effect of winning a sprint), etc. ( However, it is desirable to have a production that can distinguish victory or defeat, or success or failure).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect including an effect displayed in a first mode and an effect displayed in a second mode,
The second effect is a effect including displaying a predetermined timer image and counting the timer value using the timer image and stopping the timer value at a predetermined value,
The third effect is a effect including a display suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit,
The display means performs the second effect when the effect displayed in the first mode is performed in the first effect, and when the timer value stops at a predetermined value in the second effect, the perform the third production,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-2]
The first production is a battle production in which a friendly character on the player side and an enemy character fight against each other,
The first mode is a production in which the friendly character wins in the battle production,
The gaming machine according to mode B2-1, wherein the second mode is an effect in which the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect.
[Aspect B2-3]
The second effect is a effect of displaying a countdown and stopping the timer value at a predetermined value,
the third effect is a character effect for displaying a predetermined character when the timer value stops at a predetermined value;
The expected degree of the jackpot changes depending on the contents of the characters displayed in the character effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect B2-4]
The expected degree of jackpot changes depending on the display timing of the timer image in the second effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect B2-5]
The jackpot expectation level changes depending on the number of the displayed timer images,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4, characterized by:

The timer speed effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. This timer speed effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command to start the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the timer speed effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer speed effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect A. FIG. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 88A to 88J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variable effect of decorative symbols is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 88(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which two-digit digital displays are shown inside rectangular images. 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a countdown effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "20" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "30" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 is one second, but the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is the same as the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Faster (eg, 0.5 seconds) than the switching speed (1 second). Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) changes (the numerical value is decremented) twice per second, so the numerical value changes twice as fast as the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the difference between the numerical values (count values) of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, which were "30" and "20" at the time of display, decreases. . Here, the difference between the numerical values (count values) was "10" at the time of display, but the difference is "8". Then, the difference between the numerical values (count values) gradually narrows, the count values temporarily match as shown in FIG. 88(E), and then the count values reverse as shown in FIG. 88(F). . After the count value is reversed, as shown in FIG. 88(G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 first becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 88(H), the first expectation degree indication A performance is held. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 88(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Timer speed effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect B. FIG. Timer speed effect B differs from timer speed effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 89A to 89J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable effect of decorative symbols is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the first timer image display effect shown in FIG. 89(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 is a bar-shaped meter, and indicates the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 indicates that the remaining period is getting shorter as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain time has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter becomes zero (zero). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The first timer TM1 is displayed when the meter is full at the time of display, and then the decrease of the meter remaining amount is started (started).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, while the first timer TM1 is being displayed, the second timer TM2 is displayed. The second timer TM2 is a bar-shaped meter and indicates the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The second timer TM2 is displayed when the meter is full at the time of display, and then the decrease in the remaining amount of the meter is started (started). The decrement speed of the meter of the second timer TM2 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) is faster than the decrement speed of the meter of the first timer TM1.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 89(D), the difference between the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and the meter remaining amount of the second timer TM2 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 89(E), the meter remaining amount temporarily coincides, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(F), the meter remaining amount reverses. After the meter remaining amount reverses, as shown in FIG. 89(G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. A suggestive performance is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability (expectation) of a big win in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and "Heat!!" is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A first degree-of-expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 89(J), the second expectation indication effect is performed. . In the second expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "Gekiatsu!" A second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Timer speed effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect C. FIG. . The timer speed effect C differs from the timer speed effect A in that the speed of the timer changes in the middle. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 90A to 90J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variable effect of decorative symbols is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 90(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which two-digit digital displays are shown inside rectangular images. 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a countdown effect is executed. Specifically, both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display "20" at the time of display, and then each starts counting down (starts). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 and the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 are the same, which is one second. Therefore, the same numerical value (count value) is displayed for a while after the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed.

After that, the speed-up start effect shown in FIG. 90(D) is executed. Specifically, a suggestion image C1 is displayed on the display screen 7a to suggest that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 increases. Here, an image with the words "SPEED UP" is displayed. The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1. Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) changes (the numerical value is decremented) twice per second, so the numerical value changes twice as fast as the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

As a result, the count values of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 were the same (the difference between the count values was "0") for a while after the display, but as shown in FIGS. 90(E) and 90(F). As shown, the difference in count values increases. In FIG. 90(E), the count value difference is "1", and in FIG. 90(F), the count value difference is "3". After that, as shown in FIG. 90(G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 first becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 90(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability (expectation) of a big win in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 90(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Timer speed effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect D. FIG. The timer speed effect D differs from the timer speed effect A in the number of displayed timer images and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 91(A) to 91(J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the third timer TM3 is displayed in a state in which the variable effect of decorative symbols is executed. Here, the third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image. ”) is displayed. A point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.
The third timer TM3 is not started (not counting down) at the time of display, and random numbers are displayed. Random number display here means that numerical values between "000" and "999" are displayed randomly (irregularly).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the first timer TM1 is displayed while the third timer TM3 is being displayed. The first timer TM1 is a three-digit digital display timer image, and when displayed, "100" is displayed as the remaining period, and then countdown is started (started). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the third timer TM3 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the second timer TM2 is displayed while the third timer TM3 and the first timer TM1 are being displayed. The second timer TM2 is a three-digit digital display timer image, and displays a remaining period longer than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, while the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "100" and the countdown is started (started).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), the countdown of the third timer TM3 is started (started). When the third timer TM3 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining periods displayed by the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays "70" and the remaining period of the second timer IM2 displays "68", the third timer TM3 displays the remaining period after displaying the random number. "10" is displayed as the period of time, and then the countdown is started. When the third timer TM3 starts counting down, the switching speed of the numerical value slows down. This allows the player to recognize that the countdown has started. In addition, before or after the countdown of the third timer TM3 starts, the speed-up start effect of the second timer TM2 is executed. Specifically, a suggestion image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 7a to suggest that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 increases. The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1. Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) changes (the numerical value is decremented) twice per second, so the numerical value changes twice as fast as the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91(E), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 91(F), the third expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the third expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third timer TM3 is displayed at the position where "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI3 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 91(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the third expectation suggesting effect, the first expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Heat!!" An expectation level suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the content of the first expectation level suggesting image EI1 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the third expectation level suggesting image EI3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 91(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first and third expectation suggesting effects, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1 and the third expectation level suggesting image EI3.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer speed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the display screen 7a displays the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed. , and the speed of change of the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 are different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88, 90, and 91, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by digital display countdown. In the production, the speed of each countdown is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by shortening the length of the specific image. , and in the first rendering, the speed at which the length of each specific image is shortened is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, before the first effect, in a state in which the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, the remaining time indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed. A second effect can be executed in which the speed at which the period changes is the same as the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes. According to this configuration, since the speed at which the remaining period changes changes from the middle, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. Faster than the speed and before the first effect, with the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 being displayed, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is longer than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. After the short second effect and the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 disappears while the first timer TM1 indicates the remaining period, and the second timer TM2 is displayed. and a third effect in which a predetermined image is displayed at the position. According to this configuration, since the remaining period is reversed, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. is faster than the speed of change and before the first effect, the first timer TM1 is displayed, and the second timer TM2 is newly displayed from the state where the second timer TM2 is not displayed. Then, after the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 disappears while the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, and the second timer TM2 is no longer displayed on the display screen 7a. 3 production and can be executed. According to this configuration, since the timer displayed later becomes zero first, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer speed effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 should be at least temporarily different from the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. For example, the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily slower than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. may be faster or slower than the first timer TM1. In the above (for example, FIG. 89), the rate of decrease of the meter of the second timer TM2 should be at least temporarily different from the rate of decrease of the meter of the first timer TM1. For example, the rate of decrease of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily slower than the rate of decrease of the meter of the first timer TM1, or the rate of decrease may change and the rate of decrease may be temporarily lower than the rate of decrease of the first timer TM1. It may be faster or slower than timer TM1.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may move during the countdown. Also, they may be moved to partially overlap each other. At least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may disappear from the display screen 7a during the countdown.
[Modification 3]
The above timer speed effect is assumed to be executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed across multiple variations.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating the remaining period until reaching a certain point;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period of time until reaching a point in time;
With the first timer and the second timer displayed on the display means, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes and the remaining period indicated by the second timer A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a first effect with a different speed of change.
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The first timer and the second timer indicate the remaining period by a digital display countdown,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the first effect, each countdown speed is different.
◇[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The first timer and the second timer each indicate the remaining period by changing the length of a specific image to be shorter,
A game machine, wherein in the first effect, speeds at which the lengths of the specific images are shortened are different.
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
Before the first effect, with the first timer and the second timer being displayed, a speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes; and the second timer. A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the speed of change of the remaining period indicated by is the same.
◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
In the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes,
Before the first effect, with the first timer and the second timer being displayed, the remaining period indicated by the second timer is longer than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. a short second rendition,
After the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears while the second timer indicates the remaining period, and the first timer returns to the position where the first timer was displayed. , and a third effect in which a predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
In the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes,
a second effect in which the second timer is displayed before the first effect, and the first timer is newly displayed from a state in which the first timer is not displayed;
After the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears while the second timer is displaying the remaining period, and the first timer is displayed on the display means. A game machine capable of executing a third effect that disappears.

The timer count effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. FIG. This timer count effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command to start the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the timer count effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A. FIG. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 92A to 92J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer count effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which two-digit digital displays are shown inside rectangular images. 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display/countdown effect shown in FIGS. 92(B) and 92(C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "2" and then starts counting down (starts). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started (not counting down) at the time of display, and random numbers are displayed. Random number display here means that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2.

On the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92(A) to 92(D), the area of the linked image RM decreases over time, and when the area of the linked image RM disappears, the digital display portion (number portion ), the following counts are displayed: When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM again covers the entire inner side of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (the area is recovered). In this way, the linked image RM constantly changes its shape (reduces its area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed. A constant change (reduction in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown.

After the random number display/countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 92(D). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period after displaying the random number. By displaying the linked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starting), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 count down for a while as shown in FIGS. 92(E) to 92(H). Execute (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of the respective counts. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 92(J), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability (expectation) of a big win in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

After that, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), and the second expectation suggestion effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 with the words "Geki Atsushi!" An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggesting image is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggesting image EI1.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B. FIG. The timer count effect B is different from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the linked image RM and the mode until the timer is started. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 93A to 93J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer count effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images with a two-digit digital display inside a circular image. 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the 88 display/countdown effect shown in FIGS. 93(B) and 93(C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "2" and then starts counting down (starts). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not yet started), "88" is displayed, and is stopped in that state. On the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (eg, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 93(A) to 93(D), the area of the linked image RM increases with the lapse of time, and the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image. , in the digital display portion (number portion), the following counts are displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the linked image RM constantly changes its shape (increases in area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed, and each time the count is switched (one second A constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown.

After this random number display/countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 93(D). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period after displaying the random number. By displaying the linked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starting), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 count down for a while as shown in FIGS. 93(E) to 93(H). Execute (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of each count. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 93(J), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

After that, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), and the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 with the words "Geki Atsushi!" An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggesting image is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggesting image EI1.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C. FIG. The timer count effect C is different from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the linked image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable accessory. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 94A to 94J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images with a two-digit digital display inside a circular image. 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, a countdown effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 94(B) to 94(E). Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "10" at the time of display, and then starts counting down (starts). The second timer TM2 starts counting down after "2" is displayed. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that are starting (starting) countdown, the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (eg, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). On the other hand, the linked image RM of the first timer TM1 and the linked image RM of the second timer TM2 are different in switching timing (cycle). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 94B to 94E, when the linked image RM of the first timer TM1 is displayed, the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, and the area decreases and the count becomes zero, the area of the linked image RM also disappears. That is, the linked image RM of the first timer TM1 represents the remaining period until the count reaches zero. Even in this case, it can be said that the linked image RM is linked with the count because the area is constantly reduced with the count. On the other hand, the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 increases in area as time elapses in the same way as the timer count effect B, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number part), the following counts are displayed: When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). The interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 constantly changes its shape (increases in area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed, and each time the count is switched (one A constant change (increase in area) is repeated every second).

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 94(F), a movable accessory driving effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stops at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14 . At this time, about the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, the change in the visible portion of the linked image RM allows the player to recognize that the countdown of the timer continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 94(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is continued, and as shown in FIG. Expectation suggestion performance is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and a second timer TM1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the jackpot than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D. FIG. Compared to the timer count effect A, the timer count effect D differs from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the interlocking image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable accessories. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 95A to 95J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the first timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image. ” seconds). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, a countdown effect shown in FIG. 95(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "100" at the time of display, and then starts counting down (starts). In the first timer TM1 that has started counting down (started), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, similar to the timer count effect A, the area of the linked image RM decreases with the lapse of time. be done. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM again covers the entire inner side of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (the area is recovered). In this way, the linked image RM constantly changes its shape (reduces its area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed. A constant change (reduction in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95(C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is newly displayed while the first timer TM1 is counting down during the variable effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the second timer TM2 is a timer image with a two-digit digital display inside a circular image. ” seconds). As described above, the certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and the display does not necessarily have to change in some way when the certain point in time is reached.

Next, a countdown effect shown in FIG. 95(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "2" at the time of display, after which the countdown is started (started). On the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (eg, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Similar to the timer count effect B, the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 increases in area with the lapse of time. , the following counts are displayed: When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). The interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 constantly changes its shape (increases in area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed, and each time the count is switched (one A constant change (increase in area) is repeated every second). The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown.

Next, the third timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95(E) is executed. Specifically, while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are counting down, the third timer TM3 is newly displayed. Here, the third timer TM3 is not superimposed on the linked image RM and is displayed at a position close to the linked image RM. The third timer TM3 is a two-digit digital display that counts down to display the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from "01" to "99") until reaching a certain point. The linked image RM is an image (regional image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image. The linked image RM periodically changes in area inside the rectangular image that does not surround the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, the area of the linked image RM decreases over time, and when the area of the linked image RM disappears, the next count is displayed in the digital display portion (number portion). When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM again covers the entire inside of the rectangular image (the area is restored). In this way, the linked image RM constantly changes its shape (reduces its area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed. A constant change (reduction in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown.

During the countdown effect by the three timers, as shown in FIG. 95(F), the movable accessory driving effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stops at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14 . At this time, about the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, the change in the visible portion of the linked image RM allows the player to recognize that the countdown of the timer continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 95(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(I), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 95(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the second timer TM3 drawn with "Heat!!" An expectation suggesting image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, in a state in which the first timer TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is superimposed on the first timer TM1. A linked linked image RM can be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the interlocking image RM is shaped in a predetermined manner from when one count during the countdown is displayed until the next count is displayed. The shape changes in a predetermined manner every time the count is switched. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the area of the linked image RM changes with the passage of time during one count. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, a first effect in which the first timer TM1 that has not started is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, a first timer TM1 is displayed. A second effect in which one timer TM1 starts counting down can be executed, in which the interlocking image RM is not displayed in the first effect, and the interlocking image RM is displayed in the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 digitally displays a random number. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, and the first timer TM1 is not started. The second timer TM2 is started, and the linked image RM linked to the countdown of the second timer TM2 is displayed superimposed on the second timer TM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95(J)), the content of the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1. However, the second expectation level suggesting image EI2 may display content with a lower level of expectation for the big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1, or may display contents with the same level of expectation.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95), when the remaining periods of the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 become "0", the expectation suggesting images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expectation level suggesting image may be displayed. For example, an image of the operating part may be displayed, or an image in which the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner are displayed in a static manner may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 93(D)), the first timer TM1 displays a longer period than the remaining period displayed by the second timer TM2 at the start, but the second timer TM2 does not display the remaining period. A period longer than the remaining period may be displayed.
[Modification 4]
The above timer speed effect is assumed to be executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed across multiple variations.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer that indicates the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a state in which the first timer is displayed on the display means, an interlocking image interlocked with the countdown of the first timer can be displayed superimposed on the first timer.
◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The interlocking image changes its shape in a predetermined manner from when one count is displayed during the countdown until the next count is displayed, and the shape changes in the predetermined manner every time the count is switched. A gaming machine characterized by being able to
◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-2,
The game machine, wherein the area of the interlocking image changes with the lapse of time during the single count.
◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
Execution of a first effect in which the first timer that has not started is displayed on the display means, and a second effect in which the first timer starts counting down after the first effect. is possible and
A gaming machine, wherein the interlocking image is not displayed in the first effect, and the interlocking image is displayed in the second effect.
◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
In the first effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first timer displays a random number on a digital display.
◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4 or aspect B4-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown,
In the first effect, the first timer and the second timer are displayed, the second timer is started while the first timer is not started, and the second timer is displayed. A game machine characterized by displaying an interlocking image interlocked with the countdown of the second timer by superimposing it on the second timer.

The movable accessory timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. FIG. This movable accessory timer effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the movable character timer effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are retrieved from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Movable Accessory Timer Production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect A. FIG. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 96A to 96J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images with a two-digit digital display inside a circular image. 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display/countdown effect shown in FIG. 96(B) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 starts counting down after "22" is displayed. On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started (not counting down) at the time of display, and random numbers are displayed. Random number display here means that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2.

On the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (eg, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the area of the linked image RM increases with the lapse of time, and when the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number part), the following counts are displayed. When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the linked image RM constantly changes its shape (increases in area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed, and each time the count is switched (one second A constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown.

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The first timer TM1 has not yet started and is displayed as a random number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be completely invisible by being covered with the first movable accessory 14, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not yet started and is displayed as a random number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (retreats) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which was almost entirely covered with the first movable accessory 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 has not yet started and is displayed as a random number.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period after displaying the random number. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period that is shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. By displaying the linked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starting), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of the respective counts. After that, as shown in FIG. 96(G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 96(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability (expectation) of a big win in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first timer TM1 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96(I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 96(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A suggested image is displayed. It should be noted that the second expectation level suggesting image EM1 may display content with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Movable Accessory Timer Production B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect B. FIG. The movable accessory timer effect B differs from the movable accessory timer effect A in that the first timer TM1 is started from the display time. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 97A to 97J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images with a two-digit digital display inside a circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown (here, " 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation accepting period (operable period) of the operating unit starts or a point in time when the operation accepting period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, a double countdown effect shown in FIG. 97(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "17" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "23" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started).

In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started counting down (started), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (eg, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the area of the linked image RM increases with the lapse of time, and when the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number part), the following counts are displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the linked image RM constantly changes its shape (increases in area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed, and each time the count is switched (one second A constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown.

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 97(C), a movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down. Therefore, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of each count.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be completely invisible by being covered with the first movable accessory 14, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (retreats) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which was almost entirely covered with the first movable accessory 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down. Therefore, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of each count.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue the countdown in a state where the whole can be visually recognized again (double countdown effect). A linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2. After that, as shown in FIG. 97(G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 97(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability (expectation) of a big win in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first timer TM1 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 97(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A suggested image is displayed. It should be noted that the second expectation level suggesting image EM1 may display content with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Movable accessory timer effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect C. FIG. The movable accessory timer effect C differs from the movable accessory timer effect A in the number of displayed timers. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 98A to 98J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images with a two-digit digital display inside a circular image. 01” to “99”). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display/countdown effect shown in FIG. 98(B) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 starts counting down after "22" is displayed. On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started (not counting down) at the time of display, and random numbers are displayed. Random number display here means that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2. Furthermore, the third timer TM3 is displayed during the random number display/countdown effect. The third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image. number). When the third timer TM3 is displayed, "100" is displayed as the remaining period, and then countdown is started (started).

On the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (eg, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The linked image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the area of the linked image RM increases with the lapse of time, and when the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number part), the following counts are displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the linked image RM constantly changes its shape (increases in area) from when one count is displayed during the countdown to when the next count is displayed, and each time the count is switched (one second A constant change (increase in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can give the player a strong impression of the countdown. The linked image RM is not displayed in the third timer TM3 that has started (started) the countdown. As a result, different characteristics can be provided for each timer, and interest can be improved.

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the third timer TM3 and the second timer TM2 are covered by the first movable accessory 14 in order from the bottom, making it difficult to see. The first timer TM1 has not yet started and is displayed as a random number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, the entire third timer TM3 and almost the entire second timer TM2 are covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be completely invisible by being covered with the first movable accessory 14, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not yet started and is displayed as a random number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (retreats) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3, which have been almost entirely covered with the first movable accessory 14, become visible again. The first timer TM1 has not yet started and is displayed as a random number.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98(F), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period after displaying the random number. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period that is shorter than the remaining periods indicated by the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3. By displaying the linked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starting), each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3 counts down for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of each count. After that, as shown in FIG. 98(G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 98(H), the first expectation suggesting effect is performed. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first timer TM1 drawn with "Chance!" A degree suggestive image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98(I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (0), as shown in FIG. 98(J), the second expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second timer TM2 drawn with "Chance!" A suggested image is displayed. It should be noted that the second expectation level suggesting image EM1 may display content with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1. After that, the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (0), and the third expectation suggesting effect is performed. As with the first and second expectation suggesting effects, the third expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (0), the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and a third An expectation suggestion image is displayed.

[Movable Accessory Timer Production D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect D. FIG. The movable accessory timer effect D differs from the movable accessory timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 99A to 99J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. Here, the second timer TM2 is a bar-shaped meter, and indicates the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The second timer TM2 indicates that the remaining period is getting shorter as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain time has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter becomes zero (zero). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some display change occurs when the certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation level suggesting image, which will be described later, is displayed. The certain point in time may be a point in time when an operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit starts, or may be a point in time when the operation acceptance period ends. Alternatively, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The second timer TM2 is displayed when the meter is full at the time of display, and then the decrease in the remaining amount of the meter is started (started).

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, the first timer TM1 is displayed while the second timer TM2 is being displayed. The first timer TM1 is a bar-shaped meter and indicates the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 is displayed when the meter is full at the time of display, and then the decrease of the meter remaining amount is started (started). The rate at which the meter of the first timer TM1 decreases (the rate at which the remaining period changes) is the same as the rate of decrease in the meter of the second timer TM2. Note that the decrease speed of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) may be faster than the meter of the second timer TM2.

While the remaining meters of both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are decreasing, as shown in FIG. 99(C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the meter remaining amount.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be completely invisible by being covered with the first movable accessory 14, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the meter remaining amount.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (retreats) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which was almost entirely covered with the first movable accessory 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the meter remaining amount.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the meter remaining amount in a state where the whole can be visually recognized again (double meter remaining amount decrease effect). After that, as shown in FIG. 99(G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In the first degree-of-expectation suggesting effect, an image is displayed that suggests the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variable effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "Chance!" is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The first degree-of-expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. It is carried out. As with the first expectation suggesting effect, the second expectation suggesting effect displays an image suggesting the probability of a big win (expectation) in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and "Chance!" is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The second expectation degree suggesting image is displayed. It should be noted that the second expectation level suggesting image EM1 may display content with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first expectation level suggesting image EI1.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the movable accessory timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, a first effect in which the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect , and a second effect in which at least a part of the second timer TM2 becomes invisible due to the advance of the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 is not started, the second timer TM2 is started, and the second timer TM2 is started. In the production, the first timer TM1 is not started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by digital display countdown. The first timer TM1 is not started, a random number is displayed on the digital display, the second timer TM2 is counting down, and in the second effect, the first timer TM1 is not started, A random number is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the second effect, the first movable accessory 14 retreats and the second timer TM2 becomes visible. ,
After the third effect, the first timer TM1 is started, and a fourth effect is executed in which the first timer TM1 displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the fourth effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed while the second timer TM2 indicates the remaining period. It is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the period disappears and the first degree-of-expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, it is possible to display a linked image RM that is superimposed on the 2-timer TM2 and linked to the countdown of the 2-timer TM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the movable accessory timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described stationary performance of the movable accessory (for example, FIG. 96(D)), the second timer TM2 may be completely hidden by the first movable accessory 14 . In addition, the second timer TM2 may be configured to enter a plurality of difficult states by moving the first movable accessory 14 in the vertical direction a plurality of times. Also, the first movable accessory 14 may be configured to make not only the second timer TM2 but also at least part of the first timer TM1 difficult to see.
[Modification 2]
In the timer effect described above, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to make at least part of the second timer TM2 difficult to see. However, for example, the second timer TM2 may be configured such that at least part of the second timer TM2 is hidden by an accessory other than the first movable accessory 14, such as the second movable accessory 15.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 96 and 98, after the first timer TM1 is displayed, random numbers are displayed until the countdown is started. However, after the first timer TM1 is displayed, a display other than the random number display may be performed until the countdown is started. For example, the first timer TM1 may stop at 88 indications after indication until the countdown is started.
[Modification 4]
The above timer effect is executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed across multiple variations.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A game machine comprising a movable accessory that can advance to the entire surface of the display means,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating the remaining period until reaching a certain point;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period of time until reaching a point in time;
a first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which at least part of the second timer becomes difficult to see due to the advance of the movable accessory can be executed.
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the first effect, the second timer is started while the first timer is not started,
The game machine, wherein the first timer is not started in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
The first timer and the second timer indicate the remaining period by a digital display countdown,
In the first effect, the first timer is not started, a random number is displayed on the digital display, the second timer is counting down,
The gaming machine, wherein in the second effect, the first timer is not started and the random number is displayed.
◇[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
a third effect in which, after the second effect, the movable accessory retreats and the second timer becomes visible;
a fourth effect in which the first timer is started after the third effect, and the first timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer; A game machine characterized by being capable of executing
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
After the fourth effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears while the second timer indicates the remaining period, and the first timer returns to the position where it was displayed. , a gaming machine capable of executing a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-3 to B5-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, an interlocking image that is superimposed on the second timer and interlocked with the countdown of the second timer can be displayed.

The icon selection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. FIG. This icon selection effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the icon selection effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect A. FIG.
In this icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In this first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. Each first icon B62 is associated with a star mark and a character image. This star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. When there is one star mark, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is very low. When there are two star marks, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is relatively low. When there are four star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is very high. The character image represents a type of ready-to-win effect that is scheduled to develop in the future, and more specifically, suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. The icon B62B has three star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium, suggesting a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are different characters of the icon images, respectively, so that the suggested ready-to-reach effects are also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In this second icon display rendering 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image representing characters representing "NEXT". The characters "NEXT" represent that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect, which will be described later, the icon selection effect will be performed again. The second icon B63 has a rectangular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 100C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), an icon number change effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and an icon selection suggestion image B65 again are displayed. The re-icon selection suggesting image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the characters "NEXT" are displayed. The characters "NEXT" also suggest that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons will be reduced in the next icon selection effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In this first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Also, in the first icon display performance 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In this first icon display effect 2, one first icon B62 is reduced compared to the first icon display effect 1.例文帳に追加Specifically, the icon B62C is removed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In this second icon display rendering 1, a second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons, ie, the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 100(G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, a ready-to-win effect is developed in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. Since the icon B62B includes three star marks, this ready-to-win effect suggests that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium.
Incidentally, when the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In this embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect B. FIG.
In this icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In this first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. Each first icon B62 is associated with a star mark and a character image. This star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. When there is one star mark, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is very low. When there are two star marks, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is relatively low. When there are four star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is very high. The character image represents a type of ready-to-win effect that is scheduled to develop in the future, and more specifically, suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. The icon B62B has three star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium, suggesting a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are different characters of the icon images, respectively, so that the suggested ready-to-reach effects are also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In this second icon display effect 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image representing characters representing "NEXT". The characters "NEXT" represent that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect, which will be described later, the icon selection effect will be performed again. The second icon B63 has a rectangular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 101C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), the number-of-icons change effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number increase suggestion image B66 and an icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggesting image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the characters "NEXT" are displayed. The characters "NEXT" also suggest that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number increase suggestion image B66 suggests that the number of icons will increase in the next icon selection effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In this first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Also, in the first icon display performance 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In this first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is increased by one compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, icon B62D is newly displayed. This icon B62D has five star marks, indicating that the expectation of a big win is very high, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62D appears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In this second icon display rendering 1, a second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C, icon B62D) and second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 101(G) shows that the icon B62D of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62D is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the ready-to-win effect is developed in which the character included in the icon B62D appears. This ready-to-win effect suggests that the expectation of a big win is very high because the icon B62D includes five star marks.
Incidentally, when the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In this embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect C. FIG.
In this icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In this first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. Each first icon B62 is associated with a star mark and a character image. This star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. When there is one star mark, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is very low. When there are two star marks, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is relatively low. When there are four star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is very high. The character image represents a type of ready-to-win effect that is scheduled to develop in the future, and more specifically, suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. The icon B62B has three star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium, suggesting a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are different characters of the icon images, respectively, so that the suggested ready-to-reach effects are also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In this second icon display effect 1, a rectangular second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image representing characters representing "NEXT" and a star mark. The characters "NEXT" represent that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect, which will be described later, the icon selection effect will be performed again. Moreover, this star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1-5. When there is one star mark, it means that the expectation of a big win is very low, when there are two star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is relatively low, and when there are three star marks, the expectation of a big win is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 102(B) has three star marks, suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 102C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this suggests that an effect with a medium degree of expectation for a big win will be performed in the future.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the number-of-icons change effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and an icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggesting image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the characters "NEXT" are displayed. The characters "NEXT" also suggest that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons will be reduced in the next icon selection effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In this first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Also, in the first icon display performance 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In this first icon display effect 2, one first icon B62 is reduced compared to the first icon display effect 1.例文帳に追加Specifically, the icon B62C is removed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In this second icon display rendering 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of star marks is three as in icon selection effect 1 in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 102G shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, a ready-to-win effect is developed in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. The number (three) of star marks included in the icon B62B suggests that the degree of expectation for the big win of this ready-to-win effect is moderate.
Incidentally, when the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In this embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect D. FIG.
In this icon selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In this first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. Each first icon B62 is associated with a star mark and a character image. This star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. When there is one star mark, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is very low. When there are two star marks, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is relatively low. When there are four star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is very high. The character image represents a type of ready-to-win effect that is scheduled to develop in the future, and more specifically, suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. The icon B62B has three star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium, suggesting a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low, and suggests a ready-to-win effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are different characters of the icon images, respectively, so that the suggested ready-to-reach effects are also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In this second icon display effect 1, a rectangular second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image representing characters representing "NEXT" and a star mark. The characters "NEXT" represent that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect, which will be described later, the icon selection effect will be performed again. Moreover, this star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1-5. When there is one star mark, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is very low. When there are two star marks, it means that the expectation of the jackpot is relatively low. When there are four star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation of a big win is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 103(B) has two star marks, suggesting that the expectation of a big win is relatively low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 103C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this suggests that an effect with a medium or higher expectation for a big win will be performed in the future.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the number-of-icons change effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and an icon selection suggestion image B65 again are displayed. The re-icon selection suggesting image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect will be performed again next time, and the characters "NEXT" are displayed. The characters "NEXT" also suggest that the icon number change effect is a pseudo continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons will be reduced in the next icon selection effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In this first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Also, in the first icon display performance 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In this first icon display effect 2, one first icon B62 is reduced compared to the first icon display effect 1.例文帳に追加Specifically, the icon B62C is removed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In this second icon display rendering 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of star marks is increased by one compared to the icon selection effect 1 of FIG. 103(C) to be three, suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons, ie, the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (selected icons are indicated by hatching). ), one icon is selected based on the player's depression of the effect button 63 . FIG. 103G shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, a ready-to-win effect is developed in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. Since the icon B62B includes three star marks, this ready-to-win effect suggests that the degree of expectation for a big win is medium.
Incidentally, when the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In this embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display of the first icon B62 and the display of the second icon B63 are performed, and one icon is selected from the first icon B62 and the second icon B63. When the icon selection effect 1 to select is performed and the second icon B63 is selected, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 are displayed, and the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. According to this configuration, when the second icon B63 different from the first icon B62 associated with the expected degree of big win and the character is selected in the icon selection effect 1, the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. Therefore, the player's expectation for the big win can be continued, and the expectation for the big win can be amplified, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of first icons B62 in the second icon selection effect is smaller than the number of first icons B62 in the first icon selection effect. According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of the first icons B62 is smaller than the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 1. Therefore, in the icon selection effect 2, the player can It is possible to make the user feel that the first icon B62 desired to be selected is likely to be selected, and to improve the interest of the icon selection effect 2.例文帳に追加As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is one less than the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1. . According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of the first icons B62 is one less than the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 1, so that in the icon selection effect 2, the player selects. While suppressing exclusion of the first icon B62 desired to be selected, the player can be made to feel that the first icon B62 desired to be selected is likely to be selected, thereby enhancing interest in the icon selection performance 2.例文帳に追加can be made As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the lowest jackpot expectation level among the jackpot expectation level suggestion indications included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect. 1 is higher than the lowest jackpot expectation among the jackpot expectation suggestive displays included in the icon of the first icon B62 in 1. According to this configuration, since there is a high possibility that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when an icon is selected in the icon selection performance 2 than in the icon selection performance 1, when the player shifts to the icon selection performance 2, a large amount of money is given to the player. It can give you a sense of expectation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the icon selection effects A and B of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the second icon B63 in the icon selection effects 1 and 2 does not include the suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big win (star mark). According to this configuration, when the second icon B63 is selected, the next development is unknown, so the player can be excited. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the icon selection effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the icon selection effect A of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the icon selection effect 2 may have two or more fewer icons than the icon selection effect 1 . Further, in the icon selection effect B, two or more icons may be added in the icon selection effect 2 as compared with the icon selection effect 1 . Further, in icon selection effects A to D, there may be a plurality of second icons B63.

[Modification 2]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may have the same icon shape. For example, both the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may be circular. Also, the first icons B62 may have different shapes.

[Modification 3]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the icon with the most star marks (highest expected jackpot) Icons with more star marks (icons with higher expectations for big wins) may appear.
Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the icon with the least number of star marks (the icon with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win) has more stars. An icon with many marks (an icon with a high degree of expectation for a big win) may appear.

[Modification 4]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the icon with the fewest star marks (lowest expected jackpot) icon) and an icon having the same number of star marks (an icon with a high probability of winning a jackpot) may appear. Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the icon with the least number of star marks (the icon with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win) has more stars. Icons with a small number of marks (icons with high expectations for big wins) may appear.

[Modification 5]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, each icon of the second icon B63 in the first icon display effect 2 is the same character as each icon of the first icon B62 in the first icon display effect 1. It may be used as it is or the number of star marks may be increased or decreased.

[Modification 6]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the highest jackpot expectation level among the jackpot expectation level suggestion indications included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is You may make it higher than the highest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation degree suggestion displays included in the icon of 1st icon B62. According to this configuration, when an icon is selected in the icon selection performance 2 rather than the icon selection performance 1, it is possible to select an icon with an extremely high expectation of a big win, so when the icon selection performance 2 is shifted, the game can be played. It can give people great expectations. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 are not star marks, but numbers (for example, percentages), colors, patterns, icon sizes, and icon sizes. The degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the density, the position of the icon, or the like.

[Modification 8]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 1, in the next icon selection effect 2, the star associated with the second icon B63 The number of marks may be configured to be greater than or equal to the number of star marks of the second icon B63 selected in icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effect 2, the first icon B62 having fewer star marks than the number of star marks of the second icon B63 may not be displayed. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of icon selection effects, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a first display effect of displaying a plurality of icons including a character display suggesting a development destination of the ready-to-win effect by a character and a jackpot expectation level suggesting display suggesting the jackpot expectation level. can be,
The second display effect is a effect of performing a second display of displaying an icon different from the icon in the first display,
In the third display effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and one icon is selected from the first display icon and the second display icon. It is a production that performs the first selection production to be selected,
The fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect, and when the icon of the second display is selected in the first selection effect of the third display effect, the first display effect is displayed. and the second display effect, and a second selection effect of selecting one icon from the icons of the first display and the icons of the second display. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Application example B6-2]
The gaming machine according to Application Example B6-1,
the number of icons in the first display in the second selection effect is smaller than the number of icons in the first display in the first selection effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Application example B6-3]
The gaming machine according to Application Example B6-1 or Application Example B6-2,
the number of icons in the first display in the second selection effect is one less than the number of icons in the first display in the first selection effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Application example B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples B6-1 to B6-3,
The lowest jackpot expectation level among the jackpot expectation level suggestion indications included in the icons of the first display in the second selection effect is the jackpot included in the icons of the first display in the first selection effect. Higher than the lowest jackpot expectation among the expectation indications,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Application example B6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples B6-1 to B6-4,
The icon of the second display in the first selection effect does not include the jackpot expectation level suggestion display,
A gaming machine characterized by:

104 to 107, the effect during variation will be described below. This effect during variation can be executed in relation to the variable display of the decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). For example, at the start of variable display of special symbols, at the start of variable production of decorative symbols, during ready-to-win production (super ready-to-win production), etc., can be executed.

[During fluctuation production A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the during-fluctuation effect A. FIG.
In the effect during variation A, first, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the decorative design variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 68(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 104(A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a large character (logo) image TLG1 of "G" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The “G” logo image TLG1 is entirely colored in blue and displayed in a mode in which the degree of transparency of the logo is small (almost no transparency). In other words, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104(B), the degree of transparency and the color of the “G” logo image TLG1 suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. degree is smaller (jackpot expectation is blue < green < red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the "G" logo image TLG1 shown in FIG. 104(B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104(A). It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This losing pattern stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 104(A) is losing (ready-to-win) after becoming ready-to-win in FIG. 104(C). . In this example, "858" is shown as the lost pattern array.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 104(B), the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104(E) may be executed. This transparent logo effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 104(A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a large character (logo) image TLG2 of "G" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The "G" logo image TLG2 has a dark red outline around the logo, and the whole is colored light red. As a result, the “G” logo image TLG2 is displayed in a mode in which the degree of transparency of the logo is high (the back background can be almost visually recognized). In other words, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104(E), the degree of transparency and the color of the “G” logo image TLG1 suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. degree increases (jackpot expectation is blue < green < red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the "G" logo image TLG2 shown in FIG. 104(E) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 104(A). It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 104(A) is a ready-to-win game and then a jackpot hit. In this example, "777" is shown in this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance.
Note that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 104(G) is a case where the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. However, it is not always performed, and there may be a case where the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104(D) is performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the losing pattern stop effect shown in FIG. 104(D) described above is performed when the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. Even so, it is not always performed, and there may be a case where the big hit confirmation effect shown in FIG. 104(G) is performed with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the changing effect A shown in FIG. 104, it is possible to execute a transparent logo effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating. The degree is changed. That is, in the logo image (character image) displayed by the transparent logo effect, the expectation of the big win is low when the degree of transparency of the logo is low, and the degree of expectation of the big win is high when the degree of logo transparency is high. Further, in the logo image (character image), when the logo is blue, the expectation for the big win is low, and when the logo is red, the expectation for the big win is high. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a big win, a plurality of logos with different degrees of transparency are displayed as a big win suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.) during the variation. A predetermined transparent logo effect is performed from among different transparent logo effects.

[During fluctuation production B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the during-fluctuation effect B. FIG.
In the during-variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 68(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105B, a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 105(A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a large character (logo) image TLG3 of "G" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in green as a whole, and is displayed in a mode in which the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (semi-transparent so that about 50% of the background behind it can be seen). In other words, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105(B), the degree of transparency and the color of the “G” logo image TLG3 suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit. And the jackpot expectation is moderate (jackpot expectation is blue < green < red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the "G" logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105(B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 105(A). It shows how the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This losing pattern stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 105(A) is a losing (ready-to-win) after becoming a ready-to-win in FIG. 105(C). . In this example, "858" is shown as the lost pattern array.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 105(B), there is a case where the logo accessory movable presentation shown in FIG. 105(E) is executed. During the decorative pattern variation presentation shown in FIG. 105(A), the logo accessory LYA descends from the home position and stops for a predetermined time approximately at the center of the front side of the display screen 7a. ing. The logo accessory LYA has the same "G" logo as the "G" logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. The whole is stopped in the front side approximate center of the display screen 7a so that it can be visually recognized. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and instead, a display effect is made as if the periphery of the "G" logo is shining. This enhances the performance effect. The logo accessory LYA as a movable accessory shown in this figure is provided as a part of the above-described board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this transmissive logo presentation, the logo accessory LYA rises to such an extent that the "G" logo body, which has been stopped at approximately the center of the front side of the display screen 7a, is hidden by about half as shown in Fig. 105(F). A character (logo) image TLG3 of "G" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a immediately below the logo. The “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in green as a whole, and is displayed in a mode in which the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (semi-transparent so that about 50% of the background behind it can be seen). Also, the "G" logo image TLG3 is displayed in the same size as the "G" logo body. This enhances the performance effect. That is, in the translucent logo effect shown in FIG. 105B, the “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in relation to the movement of the logo accessory LYA. This "G" logo image TLG3 has the same display itself as that shown in FIG. ) is higher than the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, after the "G" logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. A) shows a state in which the decorative design variation effect is displayed, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 105(A) has reached the ready-to-win position in FIG. In this example, "777" is shown in this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance.
105(H) is a case where the transparent logo effect (transparent logo effect related to the movement of the logo accessory LYA) shown in FIG. 105(F) is performed. However, it is not always performed, and there may be a case where the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105(D) is performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the losing pattern stop effect shown in FIG. 105(D) described above is accompanied by the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105(B). Even in such a case, it is not always performed, and there may be a case where the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105(H) is performed with a predetermined probability.

105, it is possible to execute a transparent logo effect suggesting a degree of expectation for a big hit while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating. The degree of expectation for a big hit changes depending on whether or not it is performed in relation to the movement. In other words, the logo image (character image) displayed in the transparent logo effect has a higher expectation for the big win when it is displayed in relation to the movement of the movable accessory, and when it is displayed regardless of the movement of the movable accessory. has a low jackpot expectation. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a big win, the probability that the logo image is displayed in relation to the movement of the movable character is higher regardless of the movement of the movable character. is higher than the probability of appearing in

[During fluctuation production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the during-fluctuation effect C. As shown in FIG.
In the effect during variation C, first, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 106(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). Further, in this decorative pattern variation production, the first stage is a production stage displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a, and is a background image HG1 with a "mountain" motif. (stay stage) is displayed. In addition, when a predetermined condition is met, a stage selected from among a plurality of stages with different background images is displayed. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times, when a predetermined period of time elapses, when the game state changes, when the player selects a performance stage, etc.).

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the ready-to-win symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win design stop production is the decorative design variation production shown in FIG. 106(A), and shows how the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win design arrangement. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the ready-to-win effect dedicated to the first stage is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-reach effect dedicated to the first stage is a ready-to-reach effect dedicated to the first stage, which is performed only when the first stage is staying. In the ready-to-reach effect dedicated to the first stage, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right corner, and the character CRA1 dedicated to the first stage appears in the center of the display screen 7a. I'm supposed to do a performance. Note that this predetermined ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 106(A) is a ready-to-win game in FIG. In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 106(D) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 106(A), there is a case where the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106(E) is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 106(E) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this decorative pattern variation production, the second stage is a production stage displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a, and is a background image HG2 with a "tree" motif. (stay stage) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), a ready-to-win symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-win design stop effect is the decorative design variation effect shown in FIG. 106(E), and shows how the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win design arrangement. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), the ready-to-win effect dedicated to the second stage is executed on the display screen 7a. This ready-to-reach effect dedicated to the second stage is a ready-to-reach effect dedicated to the second stage, which is performed only when the second stage is staying. In the ready-to-reach effect dedicated to the second stage, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right corner, and the character CRA2 dedicated to the second stage appears in the center of the display screen 7a. I'm supposed to do a performance. Note that this predetermined ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 106(E) is a ready-to-win game in FIG. 106(F) and then a big win. In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 106(H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost with a predetermined probability. However, there is a difference in the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) between the first stage-only reach effect shown in FIG. 106(C) and the second stage-only reach effect shown in FIG. 106(G). Therefore, the expected value of the jackpot when the first stage exclusive reach or the second stage exclusive reach is performed is the same.

That is, in the changing effect C shown in FIG. 106, the effect stage selected from the effect stages having different background images is displayed as the stay stage. It is possible to execute a dedicated reach production in which there is no difference in the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) corresponding to the stage.

[During fluctuation production D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the during-fluctuation effect A. FIG.
In the effect during variation A, first, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 68(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a G-zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone entry effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 107(A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107(B) is fluctuating before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. When the display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "G zone!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the G zone is an effect accompanied by the display of information suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, and is a specific image effect different from the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the G zone variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone variation effect is performed by switching the character image "G zone!" shown in FIG. 107(B). When the G zone variation effect is executed, an upper telop (subtitle) UT and a lower telop (subtitle) ST are displayed on the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a to the right end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "Chance" are alternately displayed in this horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "chance" flow repeatedly in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (rightward). In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "Chance" are alternately displayed in this horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "chance" flow repeatedly in the direction indicated by the arrow YAL (leftward). Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing before stopping. It shows that it continues until the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the results of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R shown in FIGS. 107(A) and 107(C) are lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern array.

On the other hand, after the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107(A) is executed, the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 107(E) may be executed instead of FIG. 107(B). As a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative symbol variation rendering shown in FIG. 107(A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win effect. It shows how it looks. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), a G-zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone entry effect is the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 107(E), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative pattern 8C is stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107(F) is during reach before the decorative symbol 8C stops. That is, the entry timing to the G zone shown in FIG. 107(B) is during fluctuation before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop, whereas the entry to the G zone shown in FIG. 107(F) The timing is during reach after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a large character image "G zone!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), the G-zone ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G-zone reach effect is performed by switching the character image "G-zone!" shown in FIG. 107(F). When the G-zone reach effect is executed, an upper telop (subtitle) UT and a lower telop (subtitle) ST flow on the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a to the right end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "Fever" are alternately displayed in this horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "Fever" flow repeatedly in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (toward the right). The lower telop ST displays a horizontal band from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "Fever" are alternately displayed in this horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "fever" flow repeatedly in the direction indicated by the arrow YAL (leftward). Also, the ready-to-win effect is displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107(G), in the ready-to-win effect, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left end of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right end, and a predetermined character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to perform a reach performance. Note that this predetermined ready-to-win effect is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 107(A) resulted in a big win as a result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIGS. 107(E) and 107(G). . In this example, "777" is shown in this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance. It should be noted that the big hit confirmation effect shown in FIG. 107(H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107(D) is performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the above-described losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107(D) is not always performed, and there may be cases where the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 107(H) is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the big hit confirmation effect is performed is higher when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped than when the entry timing to the G zone is fluctuating before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped. It is higher during the later reach (the later the timing of entering the G zone, the higher the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed), and the characters in the telop in the G zone effect are “fever” rather than “chance”. ” is higher.

In other words, in the effect during variation D shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute a zone effect accompanied by the display of information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. It is designed to change depending on the content of That is, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a big win, the probability that the entry timing to the G zone is delayed increases, and the characters in the telop in the effect of the G zone are "Fever". more likely to be.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effects of the production during fluctuation is shown.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can display a certain character image or mark image as the first display, and the first effect is the display of the first display. It is an effect that changes the degree of transparency of the image, and is configured to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the degree of transparency of the first display image. According to this configuration, since the degree of expectation for a big win changes depending on the difference in the degree of transparency of the first display image, the player will be overwhelmed by the difference in the degree of transparency of the first display image. In addition, by displaying the first display image with different degrees of transparency, it is possible to easily change the degree of expectation for a big win in various ways. Furthermore, as shown in the effect B during variation, the first display image is displayed in relation to the movement of the movable accessory, or the color scheme of the first display image and the degree of transparency are related to each other. can also be changed. In particular, by making the movable accessory and the first display image the same, it is possible to make them more related. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the degree of expectation for a big win increases as the transparency of the first display image increases. According to this configuration, when the first display image is displayed as an image with a high degree of transparency, the player can approach the game with high expectations. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, it is possible to execute the display of the production stage selected from among the plurality of production stages having different background images as the second display. is configured to perform a dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage displayed in the second display. According to this configuration, a dedicated reach specialized for each production stage is provided, so that the player can easily determine the production stage where the player is currently staying by looking at the dedicated reach. . For example, if the game state is related to the performance stage, the player can easily determine the current game state just by looking at the dedicated reach. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of expectation for big wins. According to this configuration, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the big win even when the dedicated reach is performed in any production stage. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute the display of a certain zone effect accompanied by the display of information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win as the third display. It is possible to execute a performance to rush into the zone performance at a predetermined timing, and the degree of expectation for a big win is configured to change depending on the timing of entering the zone performance. According to this configuration, since the degree of expectation for a big win changes at the timing of entering the zone production, the player will be happy and sad depending on the difference in the timing of entering the zone production. In addition, by performing the timing of entering the zone performance at different timings, it is possible to easily change the degree of expectation for a big win in various ways. Further, by associating the timing of entering the zone production with the information display of the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the zone production, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for the big win in various ways. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the production during fluctuation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the first display with different degrees of transparency is a character (logo) image of "G". It is not limited to this. For example, the first display may be a symbol, a mark, or an image of an object or article having a specific shape instead of a character (logo) image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the degree of expectation for a big win is changed depending on the transparency and color scheme of the first display, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the degree of expectation for a big win may be changed depending on the size of the first display, the number of displayed symbols, or the timing of display.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of a plurality of production stages is shown to have a dedicated ready-to-win production corresponding to each production stage, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, a plurality of dedicated ready-to-reach effects may be performed in one effect stage, and the number of dedicated ready-to-reach effects set may be different for each effect stage.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, the variation in the expected degree of big win is indicated by the difference in the timing of entry into the zone effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the suspension may be read in advance, and the degree of expectation for the big win change related to the suspension may be suggested by the difference in the timing of entering the zone production. In this way, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win across a plurality of fluctuations. 107, the timing of entering the zone effect is during symbol variation and during reach. It may be during reach.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the zone effect, characters indicating the degree of expectation of a big win displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop are the same, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing For example, characters displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop may be different. By doing so, it is possible to further change the degree of expectation for a big win by combining the characters displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop.
Also, although the characters displayed in the telop are made to flow within the horizontal band of the telop, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the expectation of a big win is extremely high, the characters displayed in the telop may be displayed in a large size, protruding from the horizontal band of the telop. Alternatively, the horizontal strip itself may be erased to display only the characters.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B7-1]
production means capable of executing a plurality of productions;
display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine comprising
one of the plurality of representations is a first representation;
the first display is a display of a certain character image or mark image;
One of the plurality of productions is a first production,
The first effect is a effect in which the degree of transparency of the first display image is changed, and the degree of transparency of the first display image suggests the degree of expectation for a big win.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B7-2]
The degree of expectation for a big win increases as the degree of transparency of the first display image increases.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1, characterized by:
[Aspect B7-3]
one of the plurality of representations is a second representation;
the second display is a display of a production stage selected from production stages having different background images;
One of the plurality of productions is a second production,
The second production is a production that performs a dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage displayed in the second display,
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1 or aspect B7-2, characterized by:
[Aspect B7-4]
Each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage is not provided with a difference in the expected degree of jackpot,
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-3, characterized by:
[Aspect B7-5]
one of the plurality of representations is a third representation;
The third display is a display of a certain zone production accompanied by the display of information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win,
One of the plurality of productions is a third production,
The third effect is a effect to enter the zone effect at a predetermined timing,
The expected degree of jackpot changes depending on the timing of entering the zone production,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4, characterized by:

Character display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. FIG. This character display effect is a effect of displaying characters (including kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers, symbols, marks, etc.) displayed on the display screen in a predetermined manner, and the game state is in a predetermined state. It can be executed when

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A. FIG.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 108(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 108(A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds overflowing display effect is executed. When the jackpot hits, the display of the jackpot pattern array "777" shown in FIG. 108(B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 108(C). In this round number protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the round number is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the big win this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and lower end of the display is displayed to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 108(C). It is It should be noted that the R in the display of "16R" is displayed at the bottom right of the 16 numerals in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), on the display screen 7a, the overrunning number of balls is displayed. 108(C), the screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 108(C) is switched to the number-of-balls-out-suggestion display DSH indicating the number of balls to be played in the current jackpot. It is a performance. In this playout ball number protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of payout balls is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the jackpot number suggestive display DSH. That is, out of "2200 MAX" indicating the number of balls to be played in the current jackpot, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end of the number is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 108(D). (2 on the left end is displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a). It should be noted that MAX in the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a. It should be noted that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of balls to be played in this 16R jackpot.

That is, in the character display effect A shown in FIG. 108, part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls-out suggestion display DSH, which are the character displays related to the big win, are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruded manner.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B. FIG.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 109(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 109(A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown in this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds overflowing display effect is executed. When the jackpot hits, the display of the jackpot pattern array "777" shown in FIG. 109(B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 109(C). In this round number protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the round number is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the big win this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and the lower end of the display is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109(C). It is Note that the R in the display of "16R" is displayed at the lower right of the 16 numbers in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), the display effect of displaying the number of balls out is displayed on the display screen 7a. 109(C), the screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 109(C) is switched to display the number-of-played-out-balls suggestion display DSH indicating the number of played balls in the current jackpot. It is a performance. In this playout ball number protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of payout balls is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the jackpot number suggestive display DSH. That is, out of "2200 MAX" indicating the number of balls to be played in the current jackpot, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109(D). (2 on the left end is displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a). It should be noted that MAX in the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a. It should be noted that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of balls to be played in this 16R jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), on the display screen 7a, the overflowing fever V display effect is executed. This Fever V protruding display effect is switched from the screen of the jackpot number suggesting display DSH suggesting the jackpot number of balls shown in FIG. This is the presentation to display. In this Fever V protruding display effect, a part of the specific characters of the character string (alphabet) suggesting a big win is displayed in a mode protruding from the display screen 7a in the big win suggestion display FEHV. That is, only the letter V of "FEVER", which suggests that the jackpot has been won this time, is enlarged and displayed, and a part of the upper end and the lower end protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109(E). are displayed. In this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is arranged so as to partially cover other letters (letter E on both sides of V) that make up the character string. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), on the display screen 7a, a right-handed V winning instruction effect is executed. This time's jackpot is the above-mentioned 16RV passage scheduled jackpot, and in this right-handed V winning instruction effect, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened to facilitate passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. It takes place at the beginning of any round of play. In this right-handed V winning instruction effect, a message MGL composed of characters "Aim for V!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. (approximately double) is displayed. A right-handed arrow YAR1 is displayed above the message MGL to urge the player to hit right, and a message MGU1 consisting of characters "Right-handed" is displayed in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR1. . The player is prompted by the right-handed arrow YAR1 to hit right-handedly, so that the game ball can enter the V area 39 in the first big prize-winning opening 30.例文帳に追加

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a V protruding display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This V protruding display effect is performed when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the round game in which the passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is facilitated. In other words, when the game ball passes through the V area 39, the V protrusion display effect switches from the right-handed V winning instruction effect screen shown in FIG. This is an effect for displaying the suggestive V area passage suggestive display VRH. In this V protruding display effect, a part of a single character suggesting that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 is displayed in the V region passage suggesting display VRH in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, the character "V" indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and lower end of the character is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109(G). ing.

In other words, in the character display effect B shown in FIG. 109, part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls suggested display DSH when a big win is made as character displays related to the big win are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruded manner. Part of the specific characters in the big win suggestion display FEHV, which is a character display related to the big win, is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in this big win suggestive display FEHV, a specific character displayed in an enlarged manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to partially cover the other characters forming the character string. In addition, part of the characters in the V-region passage suggestive display VRH, which indicates that the game ball has passed through the V-region 39, is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B. FIG.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 110(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 110(A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds overflowing display effect is executed. When the jackpot hits, the display of the jackpot pattern array "777" shown in FIG. 110(B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of this jackpot shown in FIG. 110(C). In this round number protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the round number is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the big win this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and lower end of the display is displayed to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110(C). It is Note that the R in the display of "16R" is displayed at the lower right of the 16 numbers in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the number of balls to be played out is displayed on the display screen 7a. 110(C), the screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 110(C) is switched to display the number-of-played-out-balls suggestion display DSH indicating the number of played balls in the current jackpot. It is a performance. In this playout ball number protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of payout balls is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the jackpot number suggestive display DSH. That is, out of "2200 MAX" indicating the number of balls to be played in the current jackpot, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end of the number is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110(D). (2 on the left end is displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a). It should be noted that MAX in the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a. It should be noted that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of balls to be played in the 16R jackpot this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(E), a fever-break display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever-loose display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the number-of-played-out-jacks-suggestion display DSH for suggesting the number of played out balls of the big win shown in FIG. 110(D). In this fever-discovery display effect, a character string (alphabet) indicating that the player has won a jackpot is displayed in a moving manner, one character at a time. That is, the character string "FEVER", which suggests that the player has won a big hit this time, is displayed on the display screen 7a by moving from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a one by one. As shown in FIG. 110(E), the character string of "FEVER" is separated one by one in the order of "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F". It is displayed moving while swinging. Therefore, in FIG. 110(E), "R" which is moved and displayed first is displayed in the smallest size, and "F" which is moved and displayed last is displayed in the largest size. This "F" is displayed so that a part of its lower end protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110(E). In other words, each character that is moved and displayed one by one is so arranged that when it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a, part of the character protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(F), the entire fever reduction display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the execution of the fever shattering display effect shown in FIG. After all the characters are moved to the back side and displayed in a reduced size, they are aligned to form a character string of "FEVER", and all the characters are displayed on the display screen 7a as a whole. In other words, the fever whole reduction display effect is a effect of displaying the big win suggestive display FEHS suggesting that a big win has been achieved. As shown in FIG. 110(F), the big win suggestive display FEHS is displayed in its entirety with all characters reduced substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. However, in "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed in a larger size than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(G), the display screen 7a executes the enlarged display rendering of the overflowing fever V. In this Fever V protruding enlarged display effect, the character string "FEVER" reduced and displayed in the entire display screen 7a in the Fever entire reduced display effect shown in FIG. The display screen 7a is designed to move from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a as a single body and be displayed in an enlarged manner. That is, the fever V protruding enlarged display effect is a effect of displaying the big win suggestive display FEHV suggesting that the player has won a big win. This jackpot suggestion display FEHV, like the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. A part of the lower end is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110(G). In this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is arranged so as to partially cover other letters (letter E on both sides of V) that make up the character string. is displayed.

That is, in the character display effect C shown in FIG. 110, part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls-out suggestion display DSH, which are the character displays related to the big win, are displayed from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruded manner. In addition, as the character display related to the big win, the big win suggestion display FEHS, which suggests that the big win has been achieved, is displayed on the entire display screen 7a with all the characters reduced, and only specific characters are displayed more than other characters. It is enlarged and displayed. In addition, as the character display related to the big win, the big win suggestive display FEHV suggesting that the big win has been achieved is displayed in such a manner that the big win suggestive display FEHS is enlarged and a part of the specific characters protrudes from the display screen 7a. It is now displayed. Furthermore, in this big win suggestive display FEHV, a specific character displayed in an enlarged manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover part of the other characters forming the character string.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B. FIG.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 111(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 111(A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown in this jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds overflowing display effect is executed. When the jackpot hits, the display of the jackpot pattern array "777" shown in FIG. 111(B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 111(C). In this round number protruding display effect, a part of the number indicating the round number is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the big win this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and lower end of the display is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111(C). It is Note that the R in the display of "16R" is displayed at the lower right of the 16 numbers in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), the number of balls to be played out is displayed on the display screen 7a. 111(C) is switched from the round display RSH screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 111(C) to display a jackpot number-of-balls-suggestion display DSH that suggests the number of balls for the current jackpot. It is a performance. In the protruding display effect of the number of paid balls, a part of the number indicating the number of paid balls is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a in the jackpot number-of-discharged-balls suggestion display DSH. That is, of the "2200 MAX" indicating the number of balls to be played in the jackpot this time, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end of the number is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111(D). (2 on the left end is displayed with a part of the left end protruding from the display screen 7a). It should be noted that MAX in the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed below the number of 2200 in a manner that fits within the display screen 7a. It should be noted that MAX indicates the upper limit of the number of balls to be played in this 16R jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(E), a fever-break display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever-loose display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the number-of-played-out-jacks-suggestion display DSH for a big win shown in FIG. 111(D). In this fever-discovery display effect, a character string (alphabet) indicating that the player has won a jackpot is displayed in a moving manner, one character at a time. That is, the character string "FEVER", which suggests that the player has won a big hit this time, is displayed on the display screen 7a by moving from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a one by one. As shown in FIG. 111(E), the character string of "FEVER" is separated one by one in the order of "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F". It is displayed moving while swinging. Therefore, in FIG. 111(E), "R" moved and displayed first is displayed in the smallest size, and "F" moved and displayed last is displayed in the largest size. This "F" is displayed so that a part of its lower end protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111(E). In other words, each character that is moved and displayed one by one is so arranged that when it is positioned in front of the display screen 7a, part of the character protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(F), the entire fever reduction rotation display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the execution of the fever split display effect shown in FIG. 111(E), the characters "R", "E", "V", "E" and "F" are displayed on the display screen 7a. After all the characters are moved to the back side and displayed in a reduced size, they are aligned to form a character string of "FEVER", and all the characters are displayed on the display screen 7a as a whole. That is, the entire Fever reduced rotation display effect is a effect of displaying the big win suggestive display FEHS suggesting that a big win has been achieved. As shown in FIG. 111(F), the big win suggestive display FEHS is displayed in its entirety with all characters reduced substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. However, in "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed in a larger size than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. After all characters are reduced and displayed entirely in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, the big win suggestion display FEHS rotates horizontally in the same position as indicated by an arrow YA while being entirely displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(G), the display screen 7a executes the enlarged display rendering of the overflowing fever V. In this Fever V protruding enlarged display effect, the character string "FEVER" reduced and displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a in the entire Fever reduced and rotated display effect shown in FIG. It stops, and conversely, this time it moves integrally from the back side of the display screen 7a to the front side and is displayed in an enlarged manner. That is, the fever V protruding enlarged display effect is a effect of displaying the big win suggestive display FEHV suggesting that the player has won a big win. This jackpot suggestion display FEHV, like the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. A part of the lower end is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111(G). In this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is arranged so as to partially cover other letters (letter E on both sides of V) that make up the character string. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(H), a fever display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This Fever V display effect is the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect shown in FIG. That is, the fever display effect is a effect of displaying a big win suggestion display FEH that suggests that a big win has been achieved. This jackpot suggestion display FEH is displayed in such a manner that the character V protruding from the display screen 7a shown in FIG. However, only the letter V in "FEVER" is displayed in a larger size than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. In this jackpot suggestion display FEH, the letter V is displayed so as not to partially cover other letters (letter E on both sides of V) forming the character string.

That is, in the character display effect D shown in FIG. 111, part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls-out suggestion display DSH, which are the character displays related to the big win, are displayed from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruded manner. In addition, as the character display related to the big win, the big win suggestion display FEHS, which suggests that the big win has been achieved, is displayed on the entire display screen 7a with all the characters reduced, and only specific characters are displayed more than other characters. It is enlarged and displayed. In addition, as the character display related to the big win, the big win suggestive display FEHV suggesting that the big win has been achieved is displayed in such a manner that the big win suggestive display FEHS is enlarged and a part of the specific characters protrudes from the display screen 7a. It is now displayed. Furthermore, in this big win suggestive display FEHV, a specific character displayed in an enlarged manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover part of the other characters forming the character string. The jackpot suggestion display FEH, which is a character display related to the jackpot, is a jackpot suggestion display FEHV in which specific characters protruding from the display screen 7a are displayed in reduced size, and all character strings are displayed. It is displayed so as to fit within the screen 7a. However, in this big win suggestive display FEH, a specific character is displayed in a larger size than other characters and is displayed so as not to cover other characters forming the character string.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effects of the production during fluctuation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a character display related to the big win can be executed as the first display, and the first effect is that some of the characters in the character display , is configured to be displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen. According to this configuration, the character display related to the big win can be appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will overlook the character display related to the big win, which is very important in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the character display consists of a plurality of characters. It is configured to display in a protruding manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal to the player the specific characters of the character display related to the big win in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will overlook the character display related to the big win, which is very important in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. It is also possible to make specific characters stand out in shape and color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, specific characters that are displayed outside the display screen are displayed so as to partially cover other characters that make up the character display. It is configured so that it can be According to this configuration, it is possible to strongly appeal to the player only the specific characters in the character display related to the big win in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will overlook the character display related to the big win, which is very important in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. It is also possible to make specific characters stand out in shape and color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the second effect is to display a character display consisting of a plurality of characters on the display screen one by one, and then display the characters on the display screen. It is possible to display all the characters in the entirety, and the first effect is performed after the second effect. According to this configuration, the character display composed of a plurality of characters related to the big win can be appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will overlook the character display related to the big win, which is very important in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the third effect is performed after the first effect, and the specific character displayed in the manner protruding from the display screen in the first effect is displayed. , is a representation of displaying in a reduced size so as to fit within the display screen, and in a mode in which a specific character is displayed in reduced size, it is configured to be displayed in a larger size than other characters that make up the character display. According to this configuration, even if a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen is reduced in size, it is displayed larger than the other characters that constitute the character display, so that the character display related to the big win is possible. A particular character among the characters can be appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will overlook the character display related to the big win, which is very important in the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. It is also possible to make specific characters stand out in shape and color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the production during fluctuation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, specific characters that are displayed outside the display screen are displayed so as to partially cover other characters that make up the character display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover all of the other characters that make up the character display.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the numbers of "2200 MAX" suggesting the number of balls to be played in the jackpot are displayed in such a manner that all the numbers protrude from the display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the numbers in "2200 MAX" may be displayed in such a manner that only some of the numbers protrude from the display screen (for example, part of the 2 displayed on the left end protrudes from the display screen). mode). In addition, although MAX is made to fit within the display screen, the present invention is not limited to this, and all or part of the characters of MAX are displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen. good too.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the right-handed V winning instruction effect is a V passing expected jackpot, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened, and the V area 39 in the first big winning port 30 In other words, the V winning remaining time notification effect is performed by a game machine commonly called a V-ST machine, but the present invention is this. is not limited to For example, the right-handed V winning instruction effect is performed when the variable start opening (special 2) is hit and the two-type attacker with the V area is released. You may do so.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, part of the characters in the character display are displayed in a manner protruding from one display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the back side, and characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are displayed on the first display screen. may be displayed with . In this way, the characters protruding from the display screen are displayed closer to the player, and can strongly appeal to the player in an extremely impactful manner. The image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, by displaying characters protruding from the display screen in 3D, it is possible to further appeal to the player.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, part of the characters in the character display related to the big win are displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen, but the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, the characters displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen are characters that instruct the operation of the production button (for example, press, push, repeated hits) or characters that instruct right hitting (for example, instead of characters related to big wins) , aim right, hit right, turn the steering wheel), etc., in the character display related to the game instructions, may be displayed in a form that partially protrudes from the display screen.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
production means capable of executing a plurality of productions;
display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine comprising
one of the plurality of representations is a first representation;
The first display is a character display related to the jackpot,
One of the plurality of productions is a first production,
In the first effect, part of the characters in the character display may be displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-2]
The character display is composed of a plurality of characters,
In the first effect, a specific character of the character display is enlarged and displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen.
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C1-3]
The specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover part or all of other characters that make up the character display.
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C1-4]
One of the plurality of productions is a second production,
The second effect is a effect in which the character display made up of the plurality of characters is displayed on the display screen one character at a time, and then all the characters are displayed as a whole on the display screen,
The first production is performed after the second production,
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2 or aspect C1-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C1-5]
One of the plurality of productions is a third production,
The third production is a production performed after the first production,
The third effect is a effect in which the specific character displayed in the first effect in a manner protruding from the display screen is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits within the display screen,
In the mode in which the specific character is displayed in a reduced size, it is displayed larger than other characters that make up the character display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-2 to C1-4, characterized by:

112 to 115, the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect will be described below. This on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing in relation to the content of the on-hold during the jackpot game. For example, the contents of the suspension are read in advance during the jackpot game, and if there is a jackpot in the contents of the suspension, it can be executed during the round game, during the ending, or immediately after the jackpot game ends.

[Continuous Chan Suggestion Production A on Hold]
112 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A. FIG.
In the on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 112(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112(A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112(A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When a jackpot is achieved, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening performance suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game performance is executed. It's like In the round game effect shown in FIG. 112(C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, "5R" is displayed), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined big hit display effect (not shown) is performed. In addition, in this round game effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 increases by one and is changed from "3" to "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), on the display screen 7a, an on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect is executed. In this on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0", which are the same as before. there is In addition, in this pending internal chan-suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. A sound effect KM is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the sound effect "Tarari Lara" is shown) to suggest that there is a big hit in the game, that is, to suggest an on-hold internal match. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 . Therefore, the normal winning hole (general winning hole) 29 is a winning hole that can win only when hitting to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In addition, in this ending effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(F), on the display screen 7a, a pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this reserved digestion decorative pattern variation presentation, the decorative pattern variation presentation is performed based on the suspension occurring during the big winning game, and the suspension occurring during the big winning game is sequentially digested. 112(F), the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 decreases from "4" to "2". In other words, in this suspended digested decorative symbol variation effect, two suspended first special symbols are digested from the ending effect (jackpot game end) shown in FIG. 112(E). That is, the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112(F) correspond to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(G), the ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the suspended digested decorative pattern variable effect shown in FIG. 112(F). It shows how it has stopped. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112(F) resulted in a big win as a result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIGS. 112(E) and 112(G). . In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 112(H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect A shown in FIG. Then, a predetermined sound effect KM is emitted from the speaker 67, and this sound effect KM suggests that there is a big win in the hold that occurred during the big win game, that is, an effect is performed to suggest a continuous chan on hold. ing.

[Continued Chang Suggestion Production B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect B. FIG.
In the on-hold continuous chan suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When a jackpot is achieved, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening performance suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game performance is executed. It's like In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113(A), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, "5R" is displayed), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined big hit display effect (not shown) is performed.
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113(A), H1 indicates "4" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "4" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), on the display screen 7a, the on-hold continuous chan suggestion 1 effect is executed. In this on-hold consecutive chance suggestion 1 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds on the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0", which are the same as before. ing. In addition, in this pending internal chan suggestion 1 effect, as shown in FIG. 113(B), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, it occurs during a jackpot game. The speaker 67 emits a line SM1 suggesting that there is a big hit in the hold, that is, suggesting an internal match on hold (in this example, the line "Maybe a chance!" is displayed). The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 . Therefore, the normal winning hole (general winning hole) 29 is a winning hole that can win only when hitting to the right. Furthermore, in the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion 1 production, the line SM1 ("Chance maybe!") suggesting the on-hold consecutive chan emitted by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the line display SMH1. . With this line display SMH1, even if the player misses hearing the line SM1, the player can recognize the suggestion of the on-hold consecutive chan.

On the other hand, after the round game effect shown in FIG. 113(A) is executed, there is a case where the pending internal chan suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113(C) is executed instead of FIG. 113(B). In this on-hold consecutive chance suggestion 2 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds on the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0", which are the same as before. ing. In addition, in this reserved internal consecutive chance suggestion 2 effect, as shown in FIG. A line SM2 suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, a line SM2 suggesting an internal match on hold is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the line "It's not over yet!" is shown). there is Furthermore, in the on-hold continuous chan suggestion 2 production, the line SM1 ("It's not over yet!") emitted by the speaker 67 suggesting the on-hold continuous chan is displayed as it is as the line display SMH2 on the display screen 7a. ing. With this line display SMH2, even if the player misses hearing the line SM2, the player can recognize the suggestion of the on-hold consecutive chan.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In addition, in this ending effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), on the display screen 7a, a pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this reserved digestion decorative pattern variation presentation, the decorative pattern variation presentation is performed based on the suspension occurring during the big winning game, and the suspension occurring during the big winning game is sequentially digested. 113(E), the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 decreases from "4" to "2". In other words, in this suspended digested decorative symbol variation effect, two suspended first special symbols are digested from the ending effect (jackpot game end) shown in FIG. 113(D). That is, the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113(E) correspond to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), a losing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the results of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reserved digested decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113(E) are lost. In this example, "958" is shown in this losing pattern arrangement.

On the other hand, there is a case where the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 113(G) is executed instead of FIG. In this ready-to-win effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pending digestion decorative pattern fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 113(E). It shows how it has stopped. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113(E) resulted in a big win as a result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 113(G). In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 113(H) is not always performed, and there may be a case where the losing symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 113(F) is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect is performed is higher when the pending consecutive chance suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113(C) is executed, as shown in FIG. is higher than when was executed. That is, the probability that the big hit confirmation effect is performed is higher when the line SM2 "It's not over yet!" is higher than

In other words, in the on-hold consecutive chance suggesting effect B shown in FIG. Then, a predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and this line suggests that there is a big win in the hold that has occurred during the big win game, that is, an effect is performed that suggests a continuous chan on hold. Moreover, in the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion performance B, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the on-hold consecutive chan is changed depending on the content (type) of the line, and the line emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a. It is designed to be displayed as a display.

[Continued Chang Suggestion Production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect C. FIG.
In the on-hold continuous chan suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 114(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of being changed (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114(A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114(A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When a jackpot is achieved, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening performance suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game performance is executed. It's like In the round game effect shown in FIG. 114(C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, "5R" is displayed), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined big hit display effect (not shown) is performed. In addition, in this round game effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 increases by one and is changed from "3" to "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), on the display screen 7a, an on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect during the round is executed. In this round pending internal chan suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the round number at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the pending numbers H1 and H2 are the same as before, "4" and "0". showing. In addition, in this round-hold internal chan-suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The speaker 67 emits a line SM suggesting that there will be a big hit in the pending hold, that is, suggesting an internal match on hold (in this example, the line "It's not over yet!" is shown). ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 . Therefore, the normal winning hole (general winning hole) 29 is a winning hole that can win only when hitting to the right. Furthermore, in the on-hold internal chan-suggestion effect during the round, the line SM suggesting the on-hold internal chan-chan ("It's not over yet!") emitted by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the dialogue display SMH. It's becoming With this dialogue display SMH, even if the player misses hearing the dialogue SM, it is possible for the player to recognize the suggestion of the on-hold consecutive chan. As shown in FIG. 114(D), a predetermined character CRA is drawn on the front panel of the main body of the normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29 . In other words, the motif of the character CRA is set in the normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29 . Setting of this motif will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending pending internal chan-suggestion effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In addition, in this ending pending internal chan suggestion effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. Here, in this ending pending internal chan suggestion effect, the background of the display screen 7a is constructed using the same character CRA as the motif set for the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. FIG. In other words, in this ending pending internal chan suggestion effect, a specific image with the character CRA as a motif is displayed. In other words, by displaying this specific image at the ending of the jackpot game, it is possible to suggest a series of pending games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), on the display screen 7a, a pending digestion decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this reserved digestion decorative pattern variation presentation, the decorative pattern variation presentation is performed based on the suspension occurring during the big winning game, and the suspension occurring during the big winning game is sequentially digested. 114(F), the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 decreases from "4" to "2". In other words, in this pending digestion decorative pattern variation effect, two pending first special symbols are digested from the ending pending consecutive chance suggestion effect (jackpot game end) shown in FIG. 114 (E). there is That is, the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114(F) correspond to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement as a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pending digestion decorative pattern fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 114(F). It shows how it has stopped. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114(F) resulted in a big hit as a result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 114(G). In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 114(H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect is performed is higher when the ending pending consecutive chance suggestion effect shown in FIG. is higher than when a normal ending effect is executed in which a specific image with CRA as a motif is not displayed). More specifically, the probability that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 114(H) is performed is as follows. That is, it is highest when the pending internal chan suggestion effect during the round (Fig. 114 (D)) and the ending pending internal chan suggesting effect (Fig. 114 (E)) are performed. The next highest is when it is performed, the next highest when only the pending internal chan suggesting effect is performed during the round, and when the pending internal chan suggesting effect during the round and the ending pending internal chan suggesting effect are not performed is the lowest.

In other words, in the on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect C shown in FIG. Then, a predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and this line suggests that there is a big win in the hold that has occurred during the big win game, that is, an effect is performed that suggests a continuous chan on hold. In addition, in the on-hold internal chan-suggestion presentation C, the words emitted from the speaker 67 are displayed as they are on the display screen 7a as the words. In addition, in the on-hold consecutive chance suggesting performance C, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 that caused the speech SM suggesting the on-hold consecutive chance to be emitted, and the ending of the jackpot game. By displaying a specific image using this predetermined motif, it is possible to further suggest that there is a jackpot in the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, that is, to perform an effect that suggests a consecutive chance in the hold. ing. In other words, in the on-hold consecutive chan-suggesting effect C, a plurality of types of on-hold consecutive chan-suggesting effects can be executed at different timings, such as a pending internal chan-suggesting effect during the round and an ending pending internal chan-suggesting effect. .

[Continuous Chan Suggestion Production D on Hold]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect D. FIG.
In the on-hold continuous chan suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 115(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically on the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114(A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it suggests that the reserved number of the first special symbol is "3" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 115(A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown in this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When a jackpot is achieved, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening performance suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game performance is executed. It's like In the round game effect shown in FIG. 115(C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, "5R" is displayed), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined big hit display effect (not shown) is performed. In addition, in this round game effect, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 increases by one and is changed from "3" to "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), on the display screen 7a, an on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect during the round is executed. In this round pending internal chan suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the round number at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the pending numbers H1 and H2 are the same as before, "4" and "0". showing. In addition, in this round pending internal chan suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The speaker 67 emits a line SM suggesting that there will be a big hit in the pending hold, that is, suggesting an internal match on hold (in this example, the line "It's not over yet!" is shown). ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 . Therefore, the normal winning hole (general winning hole) 29 is a winning hole that can win only when hitting to the right. Furthermore, in the on-hold internal chan-suggestion effect during the round, the line SM suggesting the on-hold internal chan-chan ("It's not over yet!") emitted by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the dialogue display SMH. It's becoming With this dialogue display SMH, even if the player misses hearing the dialogue SM, it is possible for the player to recognize the suggestion of the on-hold consecutive chan. Here, as shown in FIG. 115(D), the normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29 has a design imitating an airplane HK on the front panel of the main body. In other words, the motif of the airplane HK is set in the normal prize gate (general prize gate) 29 . Setting of this motif will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In addition, in this ending effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), on the display screen 7a, after the end of the jackpot, an on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect is executed. 115(E), that is, immediately after the end of the jackpot game. In this reserving internal chan suggesting performance after the end of the big win, the variation performance of the decorative pattern is carried out based on the reserving occurring during the big winning game, and thereby the reserving occurring during the big winning game is sequentially eliminated. 115(F), in the on-hold consecutive chance suggesting performance after the end of the jackpot, the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 decreases from "4" to "3". . In other words, in this after-the-big-hit-reservation internal-chang-suggesting production, the state of the first holding of the first special symbol is digested from the ending production (the end of the jackpot game) shown in FIG. showing. That is, the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 115(F) correspond to the first reserved digestion of the first special symbol immediately after the jackpot game ends. Here, in the effect of suggesting a chance to hold the game after the end of the jackpot, the background of the display screen 7a is configured using the airplane HK, which is the same as the motif set for the normal winning gate (general winning gate) 29.例文帳に追加In other words, in the effect of suggesting a second chance after the end of the jackpot, a specific image with an airplane HK as a motif is displayed. In other words, in the waiting internal chan suggestion effect after the end of the big win, a background image is configured using a specific image with an airplane HK as a motif as a display effect to be performed immediately after the screen of the ending effect is switched and the big win game ends. The decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ready-to-win effect, left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are ready-to-win as a result of variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pending inner-consecutive chance suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115 (F). It shows how it stopped at the symbol array. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 115(G), the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 decreases from "3" to "2". In other words, in this ready-to-win effect, two reserves of the first special symbol are digested after the end of the jackpot game in the consecutive chance suggesting effect within the reservation after the end of the big win shown in FIG. 115(F). That is, the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 115(G) corresponds to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. In this ready-to-win production, as shown in FIG. 115(G), on the display screen 7a, a background image using a specific image with an airplane HK as a motif is shown in FIG. It is continuously displayed from the continuous chan suggestion production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 115(F) resulted in a big win as a result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 115(G). In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern array. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 115(H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect is performed is higher when the pending consecutive chan suggesting effect after the jackpot is executed as shown in FIG. 115(A) when the specific image with the motif of the airplane HK is not displayed, and when the normal decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 115(A) is executed). More specifically, the probability that the big win finalization effect shown in FIG. 115(H) is performed is as follows. That is, it is the highest when the pending internal consecutive chan suggesting effect (Fig. 115 (D)) during the round and the pending internal continuous chan suggesting effect (Fig. 115 (F)) after the end of the jackpot are performed, The next highest is when only the suggestive effect is performed, the next highest when only the pending internal chan suggestive effect is performed during the round, the pending internal chan suggestive effect during the round and the pending internal chan suggestive effect after the jackpot ends is lowest when no

That is, in the on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect D shown in FIG. Then, a predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and this line suggests that there is a big win in the hold that occurred during the big win game, that is, an effect is performed that suggests a continuous chan on hold. Moreover, in the on-hold internal chan-suggesting effect D, the words emitted from the speaker 67 are displayed as they are on the display screen 7a as the words. In addition, in the on-hold consecutive chance suggesting performance D, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 that caused the speech SM suggesting the on-hold consecutive chance to be issued, and immediately after the end of the jackpot game. By displaying a specific image (background image) using this predetermined motif in the decorative pattern variation effect, it is further suggested that there is a jackpot in the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, that is, the hold inside the consecutive chance It is designed to perform a production that suggests. In other words, in the on-hold continuous chan-suggesting effect D, a plurality of types of on-hold continuous chan-suggesting effects can be executed at different timings, namely, the on-hold continuous chan-suggesting effect during the round and the on-hold continuous chan-suggesting effect after the jackpot. ing.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the on-hold internal chan suggestion effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the first effect suggests the degree of expectation of the pending consecutive chances in relation to the winning of a specific winning slot during the jackpot game. It is configured to perform a performance to do. According to this configuration, the player can intervene technically by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so as to win the game ball into a specific winning hole during the jackpot game. As a result, the amusement of the game, especially the amusement of the monotonous jackpot game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chance is performed by the sound generated in relation to the winning of a specific winning hole. It has become. According to this configuration, when suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chance, it is possible to notify the player in various manners in an easy-to-understand manner. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chance is suggested by voice, the player does not need to pay attention to the display screen compared to suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chance by the display, and as a result, You can relax and enjoy the game. In addition, it is possible to easily change the degree of expectation of the on-hold continuous chang according to the type of voice. Furthermore, it is possible to further appeal to the player by drawing the attention of the player by making the voice suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chat into a characteristic tone or melody.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the voice generated in relation to the winning of a specific winning slot is a line, and the degree of expectation of the on-hold chan is the line. It has a structure that changes depending on the type. According to this configuration, it is possible to generate lines of various contents and easily change the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chang. As a result, the player can be pleased and saddened by the contents of the spoken words, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a predetermined motif is set for a specific winning slot, and the background of the display screen is set to the specific winning slot for the first display. It is possible to display a specific image with the same motif as the motif that is displayed, and the second effect is to switch the background of the display screen to the specific image at a predetermined timing when the on-hold consecutive chan is performed. It has become. According to this configuration, when the background of the display screen is switched to the specific image, the player can face the game with high expectations. In addition, since the specific image has the same motif as the motif set for the specific winning slot, the specific winning slot can be appealed to the player, and when the game ball wins the specific winning slot, can give you hope. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the timing of switching to the specific image is during the ending of the big win game or immediately after the big win game ends. According to this configuration, at the ending of the big win game or immediately after the end of the big win game, the player watches the display screen and becomes happy and sad depending on whether the display screen is switched to the specific image. That is, since it is determined whether or not to continue the game at the end of the jackpot game, the player does not get tired of the jackpot game until the end, and as a result, the amusement of the game can be greatly improved. In addition, during the round, a sound generated in connection with winning a specific winning slot suggests a continuous chance in the hold, and after a certain time, the ending of the jackpot game or a specific image immediately after the jackpot game ends. By switching to , it is possible to suggest pending internal consecutive chances, and as a result, the player can expect pending internal consecutive chances for a long time. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game for a long time.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect is performed for the on-hold occurring during the jackpot game. It is not limited. For example, when the game state is in a variable state, a short-time state, or a normal state other than the jackpot state, if you win a specific winning opening, the jackpot expectation in the pending that is occurring at that time A suggestive production may be performed. In particular, when the game state is in the variable probability state, it is preferable to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big hit in the reserve related to the second special symbol. In this case, it is desirable that the specific winning opening and the second starting opening (second starting winning opening, electric chew) that changes the second special symbol do not win unless the player hits to the right.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the on-hold continuous chan suggestion effect is that when a specific winning slot is won, a predetermined line is issued in relation to the winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the on-hold chan-suggesting effect may generate a sound effect after the line, and the sound effect may differ depending on the type of line. By doing so, the lines are more conspicuous, and the player can easily grasp the type of the lines. Alternatively, a sound effect may be generated after the line is uttered, and the combination of the line and the sound effect may suggest the degree of expectation of the on-hold party. By doing so, it is possible to vary and easily change the degree of expectation of the on-hold internal chan. In addition, the lines and sound effects emitted when winning this particular winning slot may vary depending on the round that occurs.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a specific image (background image) using the same motif as the motif set for a specific winning slot is displayed during the ending of the jackpot game, or Although the display immediately after the end of the jackpot game is used to perform the on-hold consecutive chance suggestion effect, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pending internal chan suggestion effect by the specific image using this motif may be performed during a predetermined round of the jackpot game, or during the ending of the jackpot game, immediately after the jackpot game ends, and after the jackpot game. It may be done in two or all of a given round.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the motif set in the specific winning opening and the motif of the specific image at the ending of the jackpot game or immediately after the jackpot game ends are the predetermined characters. Or, although an airplane was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and any motif may be used.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the specific image using the same motif as the motif set for the specific winning opening is displayed on one display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D) by providing a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the back side, and the specific image is a stereoscopic image. It may be displayed as an image (3D). In this way, by displaying the specific image in 3D, it is possible to display a powerful specific image, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of productions is a first production,
The first production is a production performed during a jackpot game,
The first production is to perform a production that suggests the degree of expectation of the pending consecutive chan in relation to winning a specific winning slot during the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C2-2]
The production that suggests the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chance is performed by the sound generated in relation to the winning of the specific winning opening,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C2-3]
The voice generated in relation to winning the specific winning slot is a line,
The degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chan changes depending on the type of the line,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C2-4]
comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
A predetermined motif is set in the specific winning opening,
one of the plurality of representations is a first representation;
The first display is to display the background of the display screen with a specific image of the same motif as the motif set for the specific prize-winning slot,
One of the plurality of productions is a second production,
In the second effect, when the on-hold consecutive chan is performed, the background of the display screen is switched to the specific image at a predetermined timing.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C2-5]
The timing of switching to the specific image is during the round or ending of the jackpot game, or immediately after the jackpot game ends.
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4, characterized by:

The error display effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. FIG. This error display effect can be executed when detecting means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the ball tray (surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62) is full.

[Error display effect A]
116 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect A. FIG.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 116(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative pattern fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 116(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 116(A) has reached the ready-to-win position in FIG. 116(B). In this example, the jackpot pattern array shows the normal jackpot "888". Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win fixing performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(D), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, promotion performance is performed to determine whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to the variable probability jackpot at a predetermined timing, and the button operation instruction performance shown in FIG. 116(D) is performed during this promotion performance. The button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, it is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction rendering, characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" are displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect is executed that causes the player to press the effect button 63 . In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(E), a ball-out suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestive display effect is an error display effect performed when detecting means such as a ball detecting sensor detects that the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is full. The ball-pull-out suggestion display effect consists of a ball-pull-out operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pull-out in the gaming machine, and a ball-pull-out operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball-pull-out operation by displaying characters. , are displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. The ball-pushing suggestion display effect is displayed on the nearer side than the button operation instruction production shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to completely cover the characters SIG. The ball-pulling operation image EG displays an image explaining the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. The ball-pulling operation message EM is such that the text "Please pull out the ball" is displayed directly above the ball-pulling operation image EG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(F), the display screen 7a executes a ball-out suggestion character effect. In this ball-pull-out suggestive character effect, after the ball-pull-out suggestion display effect shown in FIG. It has a form. When the display of the ball-pulling operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" are not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has run out within the period during which the ball-out suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. A message NG1 of "NO!" is displayed in the display area of the button image BOG. This "NO!" message NG1 suggests that the effect button 63 was not operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission failure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(G), a jackpot promotion failure effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion failure production shows that the normal jackpot was not promoted to the probability variable jackpot in the promotion production after all. Therefore, "888" in the normal jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a, and above "888" in the normal jackpot pattern arrangement, the characters "promotion failure!" are displayed. By this jackpot promotion failure performance, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has not been promoted to the variable probability jackpot. In this jackpot promotion failure performance, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed. This is because the ball tray (surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62) is no longer full. If the ball receiving tray (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) is not completely filled before the big win promotion failure presentation is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the big win promotion failure presentation. .
It should be noted that the jackpot promotion failure effect shown in FIG. 116(G) is not always performed even when the button image BOG shown in FIG. 116(F) displays the message NG1 of "NO!" Instead, there may be a case where the normal jackpot is promoted to the probability variable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the error display effect A shown in FIG. 116, the storage device (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) has an excessive amount of game balls, and during the effect display (the button effect in the effect display) is performed), a display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball-out suggestion display is performed. The ball-pull-out suggestion display includes a ball-pull-out operation image EG suggesting the position where the operation lever for ball-pull-out is located, and a ball-pull-out operation message EM prompting the ball-pull-out operation by character display, and a display related to the production button 63 ( The button image BOG and the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" are displayed in the left and right center of the display screen 7a in such a manner as to cover all of them. Only the message EM is displayed.

[Error display effect B]
117 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect B. FIG.
In the error display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 117A shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative pattern fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 117(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 117(A) is a ready-to-win game, and then a big win is achieved in FIG. 117(B). In this example, the jackpot pattern array shows the normal jackpot "888". Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, promotion performance is performed at a predetermined timing as to whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to the probability variable jackpot, and the button operation instruction performance shown in FIG. 117(D) is performed during this promotion performance. The button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, it is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction rendering, characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" are displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect is executed that causes the player to press the effect button 63 . In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(E), a ball-out suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when detecting means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball receiver (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball-pull-out suggestion display effect consists of a ball-pull-out operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pull-out in the game machine, and a ball-pull-out operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball-pull-out operation by a character display. indicate. The ball-out suggestion display effect is displayed on the nearer side than the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. In addition, it is displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a so as to completely cover the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!". The ball-pulling operation image EG displays an image explaining the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. The ball-pulling operation message EM is such that the characters "Please pull out the ball" are displayed on the upper left of the ball-pulling operation image EG and in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. That is, the ball-extracting operation image EG and the ball-extracting operation message EM are displayed at a predetermined interval.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(F), the display screen 7a executes a ball-out suggestion character effect. In this ball-pull-out suggesting character effect, after the ball-pull-out suggestion display effect shown in FIG. It has a form. When the display of the ball-pushing operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" are not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has run out within the period during which the ball-out suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. A message MG1 of "OK!" is displayed in the display area of the button image BOG. This "OK!" message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 has been operated within the valid operation period of the effect button 63 (mission successful). When the display of the ball-extracting operation image EG is erased, the display position of the ball-extracting operation message EM changes (moves) to substantially the center of the display screen 7a so as to cover a portion (upper portion) of the button image BOG. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(G), a jackpot promotion confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion confirmation effect shows how the normal jackpot has been promoted to the definite variable jackpot in the promotion direction. Therefore, the display screen 7a shows "777" in the probability variable jackpot symbol array, and above "777" in the probability variable jackpot symbol array, the characters "promotion!" are displayed. By this jackpot promotion finalization performance, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has been promoted to the probability variable jackpot. In addition, in this jackpot promotion confirmation performance, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed, but this is because the player operated the operation lever to remove balls before the big win promotion confirmation performance was performed. This is because the ball tray (surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62) is no longer full. If the ball receiving tray (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) is not completely filled before the performance of confirming the promotion of the big win is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the performance of confirming the promotion of the big win. .
Note that the jackpot promotion confirmation effect shown in FIG. 117(G) is not always performed even when the message MG1 of "OK!" is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 117(F). There may be a case where the normal jackpot is not promoted to the probability variable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the error display effect B shown in FIG. 117, the storage device (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) has an excessive amount of game balls, and during the effect display (the button effect in the effect display) is performed), a display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball-out suggestion display is performed. The ball-pull-out suggestion display includes a ball-pull-out operation image EG suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling out, which is placed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a in such a manner as to cover part of the button image BOG and all of the characters SIG. A ball-pulling operation message EM prompting the ball-pulling operation by character display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a apart from the ball-pulling operation image EG. After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, the ball-extracting operation image EG is erased, and only the ball-extracting operation message EM is moved to substantially the center of the display screen 7a and displayed.

[Error display effect C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect C. FIG.
In the error display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 118(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative pattern fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 116(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, "7↓7" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a button operation instruction rendering is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is a effect that is performed at a predetermined timing during the ready-to-win effect, for example, just before the changing middle decorative pattern 8C stops. The button operation instruction effect is a effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right corner, and is developed in the center of the display screen 7a. This is an image for prompting an operation. In other words, it is an image showing that the production button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction rendering, characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" are displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect is executed that causes the player to press the effect button 63 . In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the brim portion below the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed. is displayed to fill up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a ball-out suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestive display effect is an error display effect performed when detecting means such as a ball detecting sensor detects that the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is full. The ball-pull-out suggestion display effect consists of a ball-pull-out operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pull-out in the gaming machine, and a ball-pull-out operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball-pull-out operation by displaying characters. indicate. The ball-out suggestion display effect is displayed in front of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 118(C), and the ball-out operation image EG is displayed so as to completely cover the button image BOG. Then, as shown in FIG. 118(D), the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" EM is displayed. That is, in the ball-pushing suggestion display effect, the ball-pulling operation image EG and the ball-pulling operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!", which prompts the player to operate the button by character display. As a result, the player can understand and execute the operation instruction of the button operation even when the ball-out suggestion display effect is performed. The ball-pulling operation image EG displays an image explaining the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. Note that the ball removal operation message EM is designed to display characters "Please remove the ball".

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), the display screen 7a executes a removal suggestion display effect. In this play-out suggestive display erasing effect, the play-out operation image EG and the play-out operation message EM shown in FIG. The characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" are not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has run out within the period during which the ball-out suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. A message MG1 of "OK!" is displayed in the display area of the button image BOG. This "OK!" message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 has been operated within the valid operation period of the effect button 63 (mission successful). The reason why the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are erased is that the player operated the operation lever to remove the ball, and as a result, the ball receiving tray (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) was removed. This is due to the elimination of the full tank. If the ball receiving tray (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) is not filled up, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are unconditionally displayed until the ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is filled up. continue to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 118(A) resulted in a big win as a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 118(B) to 118(E). In this example, "777" is shown for this jackpot pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance. It should be noted that the big win confirmation effect shown in FIG. 118(F) is not always performed even when the message MG1 of "OK!" is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 118(E). , there may be cases where it is lost with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the error display effect C shown in FIG. 118, the storage of game balls in the storage device (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) is excessive, and during the effect display (the button effect in the effect display) is performed), a display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the performance display, and a ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, the ball-pull-out suggestion display displays a ball-pull-out operation image EG indicating the position of the operation lever for ball-pull-out in the left-right center of the display screen 7a in a manner that covers the entire button image BOG, and the ball-pull-out operation is performed. The ball-pulling operation message EM prompted by character display is displayed immediately below the ball-pulling operation image EG. On the other hand, the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" prompting the player to operate the button by character display are continuously displayed directly above the ball-pushing operation image EG. The ball-pulling operation image EG and the ball-pulling operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the characters SIG of "Button PUSH!" prompted by the display.

[Error display effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect D. FIG.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 119(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed (scrolled downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative pattern fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 119(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in the ready-to-win pattern arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, "8↓8" is shown for this ready-to-win pattern arrangement. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a big win confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 119(A) is a ready-to-win game in FIG. 116(B) and then a big win. In this example, the jackpot pattern array shows the normal jackpot "888". Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters "big hit!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the big win by this big win confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a round game display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a round game is performed, and the round game display effect is an effect including a display related to this round game. As shown in FIG. 119(D), the round game display effect is developed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the round display RS indicating the number of rounds and the number of balls in the jackpot are displayed at the bottom left of the screen. The displayed number of balls displayed TD is displayed. In this example, the round display RS shows 8 rounds, and the number-of-balls-out display TD shows 1250. In addition, a second decorative symbol ZH indicating the current jackpot symbol array ("888") is displayed on the upper right of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), on the display screen 7a, an promotion battle effect (promotion effect) is executed to determine whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to the variable probability jackpot. This promotion battle effect is carried out as a round game effect developed in the center of the display screen 7a shown in FIG. 119(D). When a round game of eight rounds is started, an image of a battle between a player's ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), a jackpot promotion suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Victory!", the player can be made to think that the normal jackpot will be promoted to the probability variable jackpot (the player will be given an advantage). In this jackpot promotion suggesting effect, the round display RS shows 12 rounds, and the number-of-balls-out display TD shows 1870 pieces. That is, the promotion battle effect shown in FIG. 119(E) is performed over 8 to 12 rounds. In addition, the second decorative symbol ZH indicates the probability variable jackpot symbol array "777". In other words, the second decorative symbol ZH suggests that the normal jackpot will be upgraded to the probability variable jackpot, together with the characters "Victory!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), a ball-out suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestive display effect is an error display effect performed when detecting means such as a ball detecting sensor detects that the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is full. The ball-pull-out suggestion display effect consists of a ball-pull-out operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pull-out in the gaming machine, and a ball-pull-out operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball-pull-out operation by displaying characters. , are displayed in the left-right center of the display screen 7a. The ball-extracting suggestion display effect is displayed on the nearer side than the jackpot promotion-suggesting effect shown in FIG. In addition, it is displayed so as to cover part of the round display RS and the number-of-played-balls display TD (number portions of the round display RS and the number-of-played-balls display TD). That is, in the ball-removal suggestion display effect, the ball-removal operation image EG and the ball-removal operation message EM are displayed so as to cover part or all of the predetermined character display displayed in the round game effect. The ball-pulling operation image EG displays an image explaining the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in a square frame, and the position of the operation lever is indicated by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. The ball-removal operation message EM is such that the characters "Please remove the ball" are displayed at the lower edge of the frame of the ball-removal operation image EG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(H), a jackpot promotion confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion confirmation production shows how the normal jackpot is promoted to the probability variable jackpot in the round game production. Therefore, the display screen 7a shows "777" in the probability variable jackpot symbol array, and above "777" in the probability variable jackpot symbol array, the characters "promotion!" are displayed. By this jackpot promotion confirmation performance, the player is convinced that the normal jackpot has been promoted to the probability variable jackpot. In addition, in this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are not displayed. This is because the ball tray (surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62) is no longer full as a result of the extraction. If the ball receiving tray (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) is not completely filled before the performance of confirming the promotion of the big win is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the performance of confirming the promotion of the big win. . Further, in this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the round display RS shows 13 rounds, and the number-of-balls-out display TD shows 2025 pieces. That is, the ball-out suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 119(G) is performed over 12 to 13 rounds. Also, the second decorative pattern ZH shows the same probability variable jackpot pattern array "777" as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.
Note that the jackpot promotion confirmation effect shown in FIG. 119(H) is always performed even when the characters "Victory!" shown in FIG. It is possible that the normal jackpot will not be promoted to the probability variable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

In other words, in the error display effect D shown in FIG. 119, the storage of game balls in the storage device (surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) is excessive, and during the effect display (a jackpot game is played in the effect display) When the performance including the display related to the middle round game is being performed), the display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the performance display, and the ball removal suggestion display is performed. The ball removal suggestion display is a part of the predetermined character display (the round display RS and the number of balls displayed) displayed in the round game effect, and the ball removal operation image EG that suggests the position of the operation lever for ball removal. TD) or all (characters of "Victory!") are displayed in the left and right center of the display screen 7a, and a ball-pull-out operation message EM prompting the ball-pull-out operation is displayed in the display area of the ball-pull-out operation image EG. is displayed on the

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the error display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, the first effect is the effect including the display related to the effect button, and the second effect is the effect including the display related to the error. , the display of the second effect is displayed in front of the display of the first effect, and part or all of the display related to the effect button is covered with the display related to the error. According to this configuration, when an error (abnormality) occurs in the gaming machine, part or all of the display related to the effect button is displayed even when the button effect, which is an effect important to the game, is being displayed. is covered with an error-related display, it is possible to immediately notify the outside in a conspicuous manner that an error has occurred. As a result, it is possible to quickly deal with the error and reduce the disturbance to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the first effect is the effect including the display related to the round game during the jackpot game, the display related to the round game includes predetermined character display, The display of the second effect is displayed on the nearer side than the display of the first effect, and part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is covered with the error-related display. According to this configuration, even when the predetermined character display related to the round game, which is an important effect for the game, is being performed, part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is turned into an error. By covering it with a related display, it is possible to immediately notify the outside in a conspicuous manner that an error has occurred. As a result, it is possible to quickly deal with the error and reduce the disturbance to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is the display related to emptying balls when the tray is full. According to this configuration, it is possible to quickly and conspicuously notify the outside that the full-dish error has occurred. As a result, the player can quickly remove the balls to avoid interruptions to the game such as interruption of the game due to jamming of balls, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to ball removal includes a message prompting ball removal and an image showing the position of the ball removal operation section (operation lever or operation button). are configured to be displayed together. According to this configuration, the player can instantaneously determine the position of the ball removing operation section and quickly perform ball removing. As a result, the player can avoid interruptions to the game, such as interruption of the game due to jamming of balls, as much as possible, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to ball drawing is configured to be displayed in the left and right center of the display screen. According to this configuration, the display related to the ball-draw is displayed in a conspicuous position, so that it is possible to minimize the possibility that the player overlooks the display related to the ball-draw. As a result, the player can reliably remove the balls, and can avoid interruptions to the game, such as interruption of the game due to jamming of balls, as much as possible. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the error display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the image display device 7 is composed of one display screen 7a. and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the back side. The display and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game may be displayed on the second display screen. In this way, the display related to the error is displayed closer to the player, and can strongly appeal to the player in an extremely impactful manner. The image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, by displaying the error-related display in 3D, it is possible to further appeal to the player.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the plate full error includes a message prompting to remove the ball and an image indicating the position of the ball removing operation unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the display of the message prompting the ball-dumping and the image indicating the position of the ball-dumping operation unit, a voice prompting the ball-dumping may be generated. Alternatively, an image display indicating the position of the ball-pulling operation section and a voice prompting ball-pulling may be generated, and the message prompting ball-pulling may be omitted.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is displayed in front of the display related to the production button and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the error-related display may cover part or all of the display of the decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner, or may cover part or all of the display of the pending icon. .

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is the display related to the plate full error, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to full plate errors, errors include abnormal prize winning errors, door open errors, payout state errors, switch error errors, magnet detection errors, ejection errors, radio wave detection errors, ejection ball confirmation errors, solenoid photosensor abnormal errors, Examples include an impact detection error, an abnormal V winning error, and an abnormal winning frequency error.
[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the plate full error is the target display such as the display related to the effect button and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game. Although they are displayed on the front side and partially or entirely covered, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for display related to an error, the content of the error is determined, and depending on the type of the determined error, it is determined whether to cover part of the target display or to cover the entire display. can be Furthermore, depending on the type of error determined, the error-related display may not cover the target display at all.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a effect including a display related to the effect button,
The second effect is a effect including an error-related display,
The display means may display the display of the second effect in front of the display of the first effect, and may cover part or all of the display related to the effect button with the display related to the error. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C3-2]
The first effect is an effect including a display related to a round game during a jackpot game instead of an effect including a display related to the effect button,
The display related to the round game includes a predetermined character display,
The display means displays the display of the second effect in front of the display of the first effect, and part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is displayed in relation to the error. may cover
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-3]
The display related to the error is a display related to emptying when the plate is full,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-4]
The display related to the ball-pull-out displays a message prompting the ball-pull-out together with an image showing the position of the ball-pull-out operation unit.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect C3-5]
The display related to the ball-out is displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4, characterized by:

120 to 123, the predetermined information display effect will be described below. This predetermined information display effect can be executed during standby, during a variation effect of decorative symbols, during a jackpot game, and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variation effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the predetermined information display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Predetermined information display effect A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect A. FIG.
In the predetermined information display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), a standby display effect is executed. This standby display effect is an effect that is performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is frequently used in the effect of the game machine 1 and is a hero character (main character), in other words, the motif of the game machine 1, and the balloon image C41 are displayed. The balloon image C41 describes "I am the main character!", suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, that the character CRA is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), a big win game display effect is executed. This big win game display effect is an effect performed during the big win game caused by the player playing the game after the waiting display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made in the balloon image C42. The example of FIG. 120(B) suggests 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting hitting to the right, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating the winning balls are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), an attention calling effect is executed. This attention calling effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variation effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this attention calling effect, a immersive attention calling image C43 is displayed. This addiction alert image C43 is a display that says "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and suppresses addiction to the game. In the addiction warning image C43, a description may be provided to directly call attention to addiction to the game, such as "Let's be careful about being addicted to the game."

[Predetermined information display effect B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect B. FIG.
In the predetermined information display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), a standby display effect is executed. This standby display effect is an effect that is performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is frequently used in the effect of the game machine 1 and is a hero character (main character), in other words, the motif of the game machine 1, and the balloon image C41 are displayed. The balloon image C41 describes "I am the main character!", suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, that the character CRA is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), a big win game display effect is executed. This big win game display effect is an effect performed during the big win game caused by the player playing the game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made in the balloon image C42. The example of FIG. 121(B) suggests 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting hitting to the right, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating the winning balls are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a maker's logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the big hit game display effect and before the variation effect by the special pattern (decorative pattern). In this maker's logo display effect, a maker's logo image C44 is displayed. This maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 . The manufacturer logo image C44 indicates "XYZ" as the manufacturer. Moreover, a predetermined catchphrase "Happiness to you!!" is displayed above the manufacturer's logo image C44. Note that the maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing the maker that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), an attention calling effect is executed. This attention calling effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variation effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this attention calling effect, a immersive attention calling image C43 is displayed. This addiction alert image C43 is a display that says "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and suppresses addiction to the game. In the addiction warning image C43, a description may be provided to directly call attention to addiction to the game, such as "Let's be careful about being addicted to the game." In addition, in this attention-calling effect, a display (beware of forgotten items and stolen items!!) is also performed to call the player to be careful of lost items and stolen items.

[Predetermined information display effect C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect C. FIG.
In the predetermined information display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), the standby display effect is executed. This standby display effect is an effect that is performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect. In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is frequently used in the effect of the game machine 1 and is a hero character (main character), in other words, the motif of the game machine 1, and the balloon image C41 are displayed. The balloon image C41 describes "I am the main character!", suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, suggesting that the character CRA is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), a big win game display effect is executed. This big win game display effect is an effect performed during the big win game caused by the player playing the game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made in the balloon image C42. The example of FIG. 122(B) suggests 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting hitting to the right, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating the winning balls are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), a copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, the character CRA and the copyright holder suggesting logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder-suggesting logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the main character and the motif of the game machine 1 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a maker's logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variation effect by the special pattern (decorative pattern). In this maker's logo display effect, a maker's logo image C44 is displayed. This maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 . The manufacturer logo image C44 indicates "XYZ" as the manufacturer. Moreover, a predetermined catchphrase "Happiness to you!!" is displayed above the manufacturer's logo image C44. Note that the maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing the maker that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), an attention calling effect is executed. This attention calling effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variation effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this attention-calling effect, an immersive attention-calling image C43 and a predetermined attention-calling image C49 are displayed. This addiction warning image C43 is a display that says "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and suppresses addiction to the game. In the addiction warning image C43, a description may be provided to directly call attention to the addiction to the game, such as "Let's be careful about being addicted to the game." Further, the predetermined warning image C49 is described as "Beware of forgetting to take out the prepaid card, theft, and things left behind", calling attention to the player to be careful of forgetting to take out the prepaid card, theft, and things left behind. It is a display to do.

[Predetermined information display effect D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect D. FIG.
In the predetermined information display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), a standby display effect is executed. This standby display effect is an effect that is performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is frequently used in the effect of the game machine 1 and is a hero character (main character), in other words, the motif of the game machine 1, the minor warning image C46, and the cheating suppression. A warning C47, a fraudulent act warning C48, and a addiction warning C410 are displayed. The minor warning image C46 is a display that reads "Don't hit if you are under 18!" The cheating prevention alert C47 is a display that reads "Cheating is a crime. Don't do it!" and warns the player to stop cheating, such as cheating, because cheating is a crime. The fraud warning C48 is a display that reads "Beware of fraud!" and alerts the player to avoid fraud. The addiction warning C410 is a display for suppressing addiction to the game, which is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately". In the addiction warning image C410, a description may be provided to directly call attention to addiction to the game, such as "Let's be careful about being addicted to the game."

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a big win game display effect is executed. This big win game display effect is an effect performed during the big win game caused by the player playing the game after the waiting display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made in the balloon image C42. The example of FIG. 123(B) suggests 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting hitting to the right, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating the winning balls are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), a copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, the character CRA and the copyright holder suggesting logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder-suggesting logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the main character and the motif of the game machine 1 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a maker's logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the big hit game display effect and before the variation effect by the special pattern (decorative pattern). In this maker's logo display effect, a maker's logo image C44 is displayed. This maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 . The manufacturer logo image C44 indicates "XYZ" as the manufacturer. Moreover, a predetermined catchphrase "Happiness to you!!" is displayed above the manufacturer's logo image C44. Note that the maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing the maker that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), an attention calling effect is executed. This attention calling effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variation effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, an immersive alerting image C43 and a predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. This addiction alert image C43 is a display that says "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and suppresses addiction to the game. In the addiction warning image C43, a description may be provided to directly call attention to addiction to the game, such as "Let's be careful about being addicted to the game." In addition, the predetermined warning image C49 is described as "beware of forgetting to take out the prepaid card, theft, and things left behind", calling attention to the player to be careful not to forget to take out the prepaid card, theft, and things left behind. It is a display to do.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the predetermined information display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the predetermined information effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the standby display effect is performed, after that, the jackpot game display effect is performed, and then the display of the immersive attention calling image C43 starts to fluctuate with the special symbol. done before. According to this configuration, since the immersion attention calling image C43 is displayed at the timing when the player can take a break after playing the jackpot game and become calm, the player can sincerely accept the content of the immersion attention calling image C43. It is possible to suppress excessive immersion in the game. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the predetermined information effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a big win game display effect is performed, followed by a maker logo display effect (display of the maker logo image C44), and then an immersive attention calling image. This is done before the display of C43. According to this configuration, the maker's logo image C44 and the immersion attention calling image C43 are performed at the timing when the player can take a break after playing the jackpot game and become calm. It is possible to recognize the manufacturer firmly. As a result, the player can specify the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 that gently snuggles up to the player, such as the immersive attention calling image C43, and the evaluation of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 by the player can be improved. . As a result, the player can play the game with familiarity on the gaming machine 1 created by the manufacturer corresponding to the maker's logo image C44, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the predetermined information effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a jackpot game display effect is performed, followed by a copyright owner display effect (display of a logo image C45 suggesting the copyright owner), and then, This is performed before the display of the immersion alert image C43. According to this configuration, the logo image C45 suggesting the copyright holder and the immersion alert image C43 are performed at the timing when the player can take a break after playing the jackpot game and calm down. The copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the motif of the machine 1, can be firmly recognized. As a result, a player who knows the copyright holder of the character CRA can play the gaming machine 1 with a sense of familiarity, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the immersion attention calling image C410 is displayed in the standby display effect. According to this configuration, the immersion attention-calling image C43 is displayed when the player is in a relaxed state during standby, so that the player can deeply understand the content of the immersion-intention attention image C43, thereby preventing excessive immersion in the game. can be suppressed. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the predetermined information presentation D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the immersion attention image C43 is displayed, a predetermined attention image C49 (notice of forgetting to take the prepaid card, theft, and left-behind items) is displayed. . According to this configuration, at the timing when the player can take a break after playing the jackpot game and calm down, the predetermined attention-calling image C49 is displayed together with the immersive attention-calling image C43. You can pay attention to theft and check if you have forgotten anything. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the predetermined information display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the predetermined information presentation of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the attention-calling presentation, other images (for example, the maker logo image C44, the copyright-suggesting logo image C45, and the minors' attention-calling image C46 are displayed in addition to the immersive attention-calling image C43. , fraud prevention alert C47, and fraud alert C48) may be displayed together.
Also, during the jackpot game, addiction warning image C43, maker logo image C44, maker logo image C44, copyright holder suggestive logo image C45, underage warning image C46, cheating prevention warning C47, fraud warning C48 , or a predetermined alert image C49 may be displayed.
In addition, in the maker logo display effect, other images (for example, addiction alert image C43, copyright owner suggestive logo image C45, minor alert image C46, fraud prevention alert C47, fraud A warning C48 and a predetermined warning image C49) may be displayed together.
In addition, in the copyright owner display effect, other images (for example, addiction alert image C43, manufacturer logo image C44, minor alert image C46, fraud prevention alert C47, fraud An action alert C48 and a predetermined alert image C49) may be displayed together.
Further, in the standby display effect, a copyright holder suggestive logo image C45, a manufacturer logo image C44, and a predetermined warning image C49 may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the immersive attention calling image C410 of the standby display effect and the immersive attention calling image C43 of the attention calling effect are described differently within the scope of the immersion attention calling. You may make it For example, "Beware of getting addicted to games!"Isn't it? Games are meant to be enjoyed in moderation. Please be careful!"
Also, the display position of the immersive attention calling image C410 of the standby display effect and the display position of the immersive attention calling image C43 of the attention calling effect are different, but they may be at the same position.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display for standby display,
The second display effect is a effect for performing a jackpot game display during a jackpot game,
The third display effect is a effect for performing a first addiction alert display for calling attention to the player's addiction to the game,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect is performed, the A third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a manufacturer's logo representing the manufacturer of the game machine,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of displaying a logo representing a copyright holder of a predetermined character used in the gaming machine,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
The first display effect includes a second addiction alert display that alerts the player to the addiction to the game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect of performing a card reminder display for calling attention to forgetting to take out a prepaid card,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is executed while the third display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

124 to 127, pending icon movement effects A to D will be described below. This suspended icon moving effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols or before and after the variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon movement effect, reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon moving effect A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon movement effect A. FIG. 124(A) to 124(E) of the suspended icon movement effect A are executed when the game state is the normal state. In the pending icon movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 124(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed in the normal state. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9A are pending images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. A first area FA of the display screen 7a is a pending image display area in which the pending icon 9A can be displayed, and is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) showing the area indicated by a specific color, or may be indistinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the pending icon 9A is displayed and its periphery. In FIG. 124 (A), of the three pending icons 9A of special figure 1, the second pending icon 9A from the bottom (holding image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) is prefetched The hold is changing due to Pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 124(B) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A has been added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new pending icon 9A is added to the top of the three vertically arranged pending icons 9A. The newly added pending icon 9A is the pending image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 124(C), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the first displayed one of the four vertically arranged pending icons 9A is displayed. The lowest pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four vertically arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second (holding image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are below Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(D), the next variable display by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is executed. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production A (FIG. 48). By the shift movement described above, of the three pending icons 9A of the special figure 1, the first displayed first pending icon 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) is changed by lookahead.

As shown in FIG. 124(E), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves rightward. At this time, since the suspended icon 9A that has been moved has been changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after being moved to the right, and becomes a suspended digested image 9C (the relevant suspended icon 9C). Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 124(D), among the three vertically arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a The reserved image 9A) is shifted downward. Then, a part of the first pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is partially overlapped with the pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C). Is displayed.

Figures 124(F) to 124(J) are executed when the game state is the variable probability state. In FIG. 124(F), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed at the probability variation time. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three pending icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9B are pending images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b in order from bottom to top. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a pending image display area in which the pending icon 9B can be displayed, and here is an area having a predetermined width from the right end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured to be identifiable with an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or may be indistinguishable from other areas. Here, the second area SA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the pending icon 9B is displayed and its periphery. In FIG. 124 (F), among the three pending icons 9B of special figure 2, the second pending icon 9B from the bottom (holding image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is prefetched The hold is changing due to Pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 124(G) shows a state in which one pending icon 9B has been added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, a new pending icon 9B is added at the top of the three vertically arranged pending icons 9B. The newly added pending icon 9B is the pending image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 124(H), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the hold icon 9B displayed first among the vertically arranged four hold icons 9B is displayed. The icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) moves leftward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four vertically arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second (holding image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are below Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(I), the next variable display by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is executed. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production A (FIG. 48). By the shift movement described above, of the three pending icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first displayed first pending icon 9B (holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is changed by lookahead.

As shown in FIG. 124(J), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9B (the pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) moves leftward. At this time, since the moved pending icon 9B has changed due to pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after being moved to the left, and becomes a pending digested image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C). This pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the pending icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 124 (I), of the three vertically arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b The reserved image 9B) is shifted downward. Then, a part of the first pending icon 9B (a pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) is partially overlapped with the pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C). Is displayed.

[Holding icon moving effect B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining pending icon movement effect B. FIG. The pending icon moving effect B differs from the pending icon moving effect A in the changing direction of the decorative pattern and the arrangement direction of the pending icon. 125(A) to 125(E) of the suspended icon movement effect B are executed when the game state is the normal state. In the pending icon movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed in the normal time. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved to the left (along the horizontal direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side along the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9A are the pending images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from right to left. A first area FA of the display screen 7a is a pending image display area in which the pending icon 9A can be displayed, and is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) showing the area indicated by a specific color, or may be indistinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the pending icon 9A is displayed and its periphery. In FIG. 125 (A), among the three pending icons 9A of the special figure 1, the second pending icon 9A from the right (holding image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) is prefetched The hold is changing due to Pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 125(B) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A has been added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new pending icon 9A is added to the leftmost of the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9A. The newly added pending icon 9A is the pending image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 125(C), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9A is displayed first. The rightmost reserved icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second (holding image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are on the right Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125(D), the following variable display is executed with the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R. The lower decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the upper decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production D (FIG. 51). By the shift movement described above, of the three pending icons 9A of the special figure 1, the first displayed first pending icon 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) is changed by lookahead.

As shown in FIG. 125(E), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the suspended icon 9A that has been moved has been changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after being moved upward, and becomes the suspended digested image 9C (the relevant suspended icon 9C). Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 125(D), among the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a The reserved image 9A) shifts to the right. Then, a part of the first pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is partially overlapped with the pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C). Is displayed.

Figures 125(F) to 125(J) are executed when the game state is the variable probability state. In FIG. 125(F), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at the probability variable time. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved to the left (along the horizontal direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9B are pending images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b in order from left to right. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a pending image display area in which the pending icon 9B can be displayed. Here, the area has a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) showing the area indicated by a specific color, or may be indistinguishable from other areas. Here, the second area SA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the pending icon 9B is displayed and its surroundings. In FIG. 125 (F), among the three pending icons 9B of the special figure 2, the second pending icon 9B from the left (holding image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is prefetched The hold is changing due to Pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 125(G) shows a state in which one pending icon 9B has been added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, a new pending icon 9B is added to the far right of the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9B. The newly added pending icon 9B is the pending image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 125(H), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9B is displayed first. The leftmost pending icon 9B (the pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) moves downward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second (holding image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are on the left Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125(I), the following variable display is executed by the lower decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the upper decorative design 8R. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R, which start the fluctuation, may be in the form of the decorative pattern fluctuation effect A (FIG. 48). By the shift movement described above, of the three pending icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first displayed first pending icon 9B (holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is changed by lookahead.

As shown in FIG. 125(J), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9B (the pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) moves downward. At this time, since the suspended icon 9B that has been moved has been changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after being moved downward, and becomes a suspended digested image 9C (the relevant suspended icon 9C). This pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the pending icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 125 (I), among the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b The reserved image 9B) is shifted to the left. Then, a part of the first pending icon 9B (a pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) is partially overlapped with the pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C). Is displayed.

[Holding icon moving effect C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon movement effect C. FIG. The suspended icon movement effect C differs from the suspended icon movement effect A in terms of the game state and display mode of suspension. Figure 126 (A) ~ Figure 126 (J) is executed when the game state is non-probability variable time-saving state. In the pending icon movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 126A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed during time saving. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are respectively displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. be done. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are respectively arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9A are pending images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. The three pending icons 9B are similarly pending images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b in order from bottom to top. The reserved icon 9B of the special figure 2 is displayed overlapping a part of the reserved icon 9A of the special figure 1. - 特許庁The hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1 (prioritized digestion). Therefore, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed so that the reserved icon 9B to be preferentially digested is superimposed on the upper side.

A first area FA of the display screen 7a is a pending image display area capable of displaying the pending icons 9A and 9B, and is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color, or may be indistinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately set the first area FA as an area including the area where the pending icons 9A and 9B are displayed and its periphery. In FIG. 126 (A), among the three pending icons 9B of special figure 2, the second pending icon 9B from the bottom (holding image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is prefetched The hold is changing due to Pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 126(B) shows a state in which one reserved icon 9B of special figure 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new pending icon 9B is added to the top of the three vertically arranged pending icons 9B. The newly added pending icon 9B is the pending image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 126(C), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the first displayed one of the four vertically arranged pending icons 9B is displayed. The lowest reserved icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four vertically arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second (holding image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are below Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(D), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production A (FIG. 48). By the shift movement described above, of the three pending icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first displayed first pending icon 9B (holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is changed by lookahead.

As shown in FIG. 126(E), when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9B (the pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) moves rightward. At this time, since the suspended icon 9B that has been moved has been changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after being moved to the right, and becomes a suspended digested image 9C (the relevant suspended icon 9C). Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 126(D), among the three vertically arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b The reserved image 9B) is shifted downward. Then, a part of the first pending icon 9B (a pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) is partially overlapped with the pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the next variable display by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is executed. At this time, a special ready-to-win effect or the like may be executed.

The shift movement of the pending icon 9B is repeated, and as shown in FIGS. 126(G) and (H), when the last pending icon 9B is consumed, as shown in FIG. Pending digestion of the pending icon 9A is started. Here, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three vertically arranged reserved icons 9A, the first displayed lowest reserved icon 9A ( The reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the three vertically arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second (holding image 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are below Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the next variable display by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is executed.

[Holding icon moving effect D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon movement effect D. FIG. The suspended icon movement effect D differs from the suspended icon movement effect A in the game state, the display mode of suspension, the changing direction of decorative symbols, and the arrangement direction of the suspended icon. Figure 127 (A) ~ Figure 127 (J) is executed when the game state is non-probability variable time-saving state. In the pending icon movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed during time saving. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved to the left (along the horizontal direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are respectively displayed side by side along the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. be done. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are respectively arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9A are the pending images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from right to left. The three pending icons 9B are similarly pending images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b in order from left to right. The reserved icon 9B of the special figure 2 is displayed overlapping a part of the reserved icon 9A of the special figure 1. - 特許庁The hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1 (prioritized digestion). Therefore, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed so that the reserved icon 9B to be preferentially digested is superimposed on the upper side.

A first area FA of the display screen 7a is a pending image display area in which the pending icons 9A and 9B can be displayed. Here, the area has a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured to be identifiable by an image (area image) showing the area indicated by a specific color, or may be indistinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately set the first area FA as an area including the area where the pending icons 9A and 9B are displayed and its periphery. In FIG. 127 (A), among the three pending icons 9B of the special figure 2, the second pending icon 9B from the right (holding image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is prefetched The hold is changing due to Pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 127(B) shows a state in which one reserved icon 9B of special figure 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new pending icon 9B is added to the leftmost of the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9B. The newly added pending icon 9B is the pending image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 127(C), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9B is displayed first. The rightmost reserved icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second (holding image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are on the right Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127(D), the following variable display is executed with the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R. The lower decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the upper decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production D (FIG. 51). By the shift movement described above, of the three pending icons 9B of the special figure 2, the first displayed first pending icon 9B (holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) is changed by lookahead.

As shown in FIG. 127(E), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9B (the pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) moves upward. At this time, since the suspended icon 9B that has been moved has been changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after being moved upward, and becomes a suspended digested image 9C (the relevant suspended icon 9C). Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 127 (D), among the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9B, the remaining pending icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b The reserved image 9B) is shifted to the right. Then, a part of the first pending icon 9B (a pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b) is partially overlapped with the pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127(F), the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R. At this time, a special ready-to-win effect or the like may be executed.

The shift movement of the pending icon 9B is repeated, and as shown in FIGS. 127(G) and (H), when the last pending icon 9B is digested, as shown in FIG. Pending digestion of the pending icon 9A is started. Here, when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three horizontally arranged reserved icons 9A, the first displayed lowest reserved icon 9A ( The reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second (holding image 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are on the right Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127(J), the following variable display is executed with the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon movement effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a first effect (normal time) is displayed in which a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction. and a second effect (variable probability) in which a plurality of pending icons 9B are displayed in a row along the vertical direction in a second area SA whose position in the horizontal direction is different from that of the first area FA. can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124(C), in the first effect (normal time), among the plurality of pending icons 9A, the first displayed pending icon 9A is displayed in the horizontal direction. The second and subsequent remaining hold icons 9A are shifted vertically (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124(H), in the second effect (variable probability), among the plurality of pending icons 9B, the first displayed pending icon 9B is displayed in the horizontal direction. 124(C), (E), (H) ( J), in the first effect (normal time) and the second effect (variable probability), the pending icons 9A and 9B moved along the horizontal direction disappear from the display screen 7a and do not disappear. There is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a plurality of reserved icons 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 and a plurality of reserved icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction, and a plurality of reserved icons 9B corresponding to special figure 2 are overlapped and displayed on a part of the plurality of reserved icons 9A corresponding to special figure 1. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the third effect, among the plurality of pending icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2, the first displayed pending icon 9B is displayed along the left-right direction. , and the rest of the second and subsequent pending icons are shifted vertically (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 and 126, the first effect (normal time), the second effect (probability variable time), and the third effect (time saving time) are Each has a different game state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
124(A) to 124(E) are executed when the game state is the normal state, and FIGS. 124(F) to 124(J) are executed when the game state is the normal state. It is supposed to be executed when the probability change state. However, FIGS. 124(A) to 124(E) and FIGS. 124(F) to 124(J) may be executed in the same gaming state. For example, FIGS. 124(A) to 124(E) and FIGS. 124(F) to 124(J) may be executed in different production modes in the same game state (for example, normal state). The same applies to the pending icon movement effect B.
[Modification 2]
Fig. 126(A) to Fig. 126(J) of the pending icon movement effect C described above are executed when the game state is a non-probability variable time saving state. However, FIG. 126(A) to FIG. 126(J) of the pending icon movement effect C may be executed when the game state is in a state other than the non-probable time-saving state. The same applies to the suspended icon movement effect D.
[Modification 3]
The effects shown in the pending icon movement effects A to D may all be executed in the same game state. For example, the effects shown in pending icon movement effects A to D may be executed in different effect modes in the same game state (for example, normal state).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
a first effect in which a plurality of said pending icons are displayed side by side along a first direction in a first area of said display means;
A second area in which a plurality of said pending icons are displayed side by side along said first direction in a second area whose position in a second direction intersecting said first direction is different from said first area A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, among the plurality of suspended icons, the first displayed suspended icon moves along the second direction, and the remaining suspended icons displayed after the second move along the second direction. A gaming machine characterized by shift movement along one direction.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
In the second effect, the first displayed suspended icon among the plurality of suspended icons moves along the second direction, and the remaining suspended icons displayed after the second move in the second direction. Shift movement along the direction of 1,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first effect and the second effect, the suspended icon moved along the second direction may or may not disappear from the display means.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the first area of the display means, a plurality of the reserved icons corresponding to the special figure 1 and a plurality of the reserved icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along a first direction. In addition, a third effect can be executed in which a plurality of reserved icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are superimposed on a part of the plurality of reserved icons corresponding to the special figure 1.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4,
In the third effect, among the plurality of reserved icons corresponding to the special figure 2, the first displayed reserved icon moves along the second direction, and the remaining displayed second and subsequent A gaming machine, wherein the reserved icon shifts and moves along the first direction.
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4 or aspect D1-5,
A gaming machine, wherein the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are different in game state.

The suspension icon superimposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. FIG. This pending icon superimposition effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols or before and after the change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the pending icon superimposition effect is included. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon superimposed effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon superimposition effect A. FIG. The pending icon superimposition effect A is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the pending icon superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three pending icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a at the left end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9A are pending images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. In FIG. 128(A), the pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 128(B) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A has been added. Here, a new pending icon 9A is added to the top of the three vertically arranged pending icons 9A. The newly added pending icon 9A is the pending image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Here, the hold icon 9A, which is newly added, has been changed by prefetching. As shown in FIG. 128(C), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the first displayed one of the vertically arranged four reserved icons 9A is displayed. The bottom normal state pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four vertically arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second (holding image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are below Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 128(D), the next variable display by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is executed. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production A (FIG. 48). The pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 128(E), during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the first displayed reserved icon among the three vertically arranged reserved icons 9A. 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special-figure holding storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the holding change by prefetching is performed. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, the suggestion image PM suggesting that the specific state will be entered is displayed. This suggestive image PM covers a portion of the adjacent pending icon 9A one behind. After that, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 128(F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestive image PM disappears and the pending icon 9A in the specific state and the first image CM adjacent to the pending icon 9A are displayed. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enveloping the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smiling face mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent pending icon 9A immediately behind and the pending icon 9A further behind that.

As shown in FIG. 128(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves rightward. At this time, since the moved pending icon 9A has changed due to the prefetching (becomes in a specific state), the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and as shown in FIG. The pending icon 9C) is displayed. Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. Also, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 128(F), among the three vertically arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a The reserved image 9A) shifts downward as shown in FIG. 128(G). Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a part of the first pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is a part of the pending digest image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C) is displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the following variable display is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production A (FIG. 48).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(I), during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display disappears and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. is displayed. The second image LM is a smiley face here, and moves leftward after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 128(J), it overlaps with the first image CM and partially covers the first image CM.

[Holding icon superimposed effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon superimposition effect B. FIG. The suspended icon superimposed effect B is different from the suspended icon superimposed effect A in the changing direction of the decorative pattern and the arrangement direction of the suspended icon. The pending icon superimposition effect B is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the reserved icon superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved to the left (along the horizontal direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three pending icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side along the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The three pending icons 9A are the pending images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from right to left. In FIG. 129(A), the pending digested image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 129B shows a state in which one pending icon 9A has been added. Here, a new pending icon 9A is added to the leftmost of the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9A. The newly added pending icon 9A is the pending image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Here, the hold icon 9A, which is newly added, has been changed by prefetching. As shown in FIG. 129(C), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9A is displayed first. The rightmost normal state pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the pending digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second (holding image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are on the right Shift move in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 129(D), the following variable display is executed with the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R at the start of the variation may be in the form of the decorative pattern variation production D (FIG. 51). The pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 129(E), during the variable display of the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R, the first displayed hold icon among the three horizontally arranged hold icons 9A. 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special-figure holding storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the holding change by prefetching is performed. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, the suggestion image PM suggesting that the specific state will be entered is displayed. This suggestive image PM covers a portion of the adjacent pending icon 9A one behind. After that, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 129(F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestive image PM disappears and the pending icon 9A in the specific state and the first image CM adjacent to the pending icon 9A are displayed. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enveloping the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smiling face mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent pending icon 9A immediately behind and the pending icon 9A further behind that.

As shown in FIG. 129(G), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. , The initially displayed pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the moved pending icon 9A has changed due to prefetching (becomes in a specific state), the display does not disappear even after being moved upward, and as shown in FIG. The pending icon 9C) is displayed. Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. Also, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 129(F), among the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9A, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed after the second one (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a The reserved image 9A) shifts to the right as shown in FIG. 129(G). Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (H), a part of the first pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is a part of the pending digest image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C) is displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the following variable display is executed by the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R at the start of the variation may be in the form of the decorative pattern variation production D (FIG. 51).

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(I), during the variable display of the lower decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and upper decorative pattern 8R, the variable display disappears and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. is displayed. The second image LM is a smiley face here, and moves leftward after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 129(J), it overlaps with the first image CM and partially covers the first image CM.

[Hold icon superimposed effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon superimposition effect C. FIG. The pending icon superimposed effect C differs from the pending icon superimposed effect A in the display mode of the pending icon 9A and the display mode of the pending icon 9C. The pending icon superimposition effect C is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the pending icon superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the pending digest image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C) is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a, and the two pending icons 9A of the special figure 1 are above the relevant pending icon 9C, along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a are displayed side by side. That is, the pending icon 9C and the two pending icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbols. The two pending icons 9A are the pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. Here, the first displayed lowermost pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is in a specific state by prefetching (holding changes ing. This first pending icon 9A is displayed overlapping the pending digested image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C) below it, making a portion of the suspended icon 9A difficult to see. The second pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is displayed overlapping the first pending icon 9A, and a part of it becomes difficult to see. there is

FIG. 130(B) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A has been added. Here, a new pending icon 9A is added to the top of the two vertically arranged pending icons 9A. The newly added pending icon 9A is the pending image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 130(C), when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, the pending digested image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C) disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 130(D), among the two vertically arranged pending icons 9A, the lowest specific state pending icon 9A displayed first (first special figure pending storage area 85a) The suspended image 9A) corresponding to one storage area moves downward and becomes the suspended icon 9C. In addition, the remaining two pending icons 9A (the pending images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) are also shifted downward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130(E), the next variable display by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is executed. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which start the variation, may be in the form of the decorative design variation production A (FIG. 48). During the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the newly displayed first (first) reserved icon among the two vertically arranged reserved icons 9A. 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special-figure holding storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the holding change by prefetching is performed. In other words, before the suspension icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player, the suggestion image PM suggesting that the suspension change will occur is displayed. This suggestive image PM covers a portion of the adjacent pending icon 9A one behind and a portion of the adjacent pending icon 9C one ahead. After that, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 130(F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestive image PM disappears, and the first suspended icon 9A in the specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the first suspended icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enveloping the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smiling face mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent pending icon 9A one behind and the adjacent pending pending icon 9C.

As shown in FIG. 130(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears and the first (first displayed) icon is displayed. The pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves downward toward the display position of the pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining reserved icons 9A displayed after the second (the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) are also shifted downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 130(H), the first (first displayed) pending icon 9A becomes a new pending digested image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C). Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. Also, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. FIG. 130(H) shows a mode in which the pending icon 9A is newly added while the next variable display is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R at the start of variation may be in the mode of decorative design variation production A (FIG. 48).

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(I), during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display disappears and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. is displayed. The second image LM is a smiley face here, and moves leftward after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130(J), it overlaps with the first image CM and partially covers the first image CM.

[Holding icon superimposed effect D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon superimposition effect D. FIG. The suspended icon superimposed effect C differs from the suspended icon superimposed effect A in the variation direction of the decorative symbols, the display mode of the suspended icon, and the display mode of the suspended icon 9C. The pending icon superimposition effect D is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the pending icon superimposition effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131(A), the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner, are moved to the left (along the horizontal direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the pending digest image 9C (the pending icon 9C) is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a, and the two pending icons 9A of the special figure 1 are on the left side of the pending icon 9C, along the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a. are displayed side by side. That is, the pending icon 9C and the two pending icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along which the decorative symbols change. The two pending icons 9A are the pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from right to left. Here, the rightmost reserved icon 9A displayed first (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a) becomes a specific state by prefetching (holding changes ing. This first pending icon 9A is displayed overlapping the pending digested image 9C (the pending icon 9C) on the right thereof, making a portion of the suspended icon 9A difficult to see. The second pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is displayed overlapping the first pending icon 9A, and a part of it becomes difficult to see. there is

FIG. 131(B) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A has been added. Here, a new pending icon 9A is added to the leftmost of the horizontally arranged two pending icons 9A. The newly added pending icon 9A is the pending image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. When a new pending icon 9A is added, the pending icon 9A immediately before (on the right side of) the pending icon 9A to be added is once moved to the left and does not overlap the previous pending icon. Also, the newly added pending icon 9A does not overlap the previous (right) pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(C), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the pending digested image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C) moves upward. and then disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, among the three horizontally arranged pending icons 9A, the rightmost specific state pending icon 9A displayed first (pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves to the right and becomes the pending icon 9C. In addition, the remaining two pending icons 9A (the pending images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) are also shifted rightward. As a result of this shift movement, as shown in FIG. 131(D), the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A again partly overlap the previous and subsequent pending icons. Then, the following variable display by the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R is executed. The lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R at the start of the variation may be in the form of the decorative pattern variation production D (FIG. 51).

As shown in FIG. 131(E), during the variable display of the lower decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and upper decorative pattern 8R, it is newly displayed first among the two horizontally arranged hold icons 9A. The (first displayed) pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is the preview image PM before the pending change by prefetching is displayed. . In other words, before the suspension icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player, the suggestion image PM suggesting that the suspension change will occur is displayed. This suggestive image PM covers a portion of the adjacent pending icon 9A one behind and a portion of the adjacent pending icon 9C one ahead. After that, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 131(F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestive image PM disappears, and the first suspended icon 9A in the specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the first suspended icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enveloping the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smiling face mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent pending icon 9A one behind and the adjacent pending pending icon 9C.

As shown in FIG. 131(G), when the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, and as shown in FIG. 131(H). , The first (first displayed) pending icon 9A (the pending image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) moves rightward toward the display position of the pending icon 9C. do. In addition, the second displayed remaining pending icon 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a) is also shifted rightward. As a result, the first (first displayed) pending icon 9A becomes a new pending digested image 9C (the relevant pending icon 9C). Then, this pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. Also, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the pending icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the pending icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 131(I), the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while the next variable display of the lower decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the upper decorative design 8R is performed. The second image LM is a smiley face here, and moves leftward after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 131(J), it overlaps with the first image CM and partially covers the first image CM. At this time, the variable display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R disappears.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon superimposition effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a first effect in which the pending digest image 9C (the pending icon 9C) is superimposed on a part of the pending icon 9A, and FIG. As shown in D), a second effect in which the pending icon 9A is displayed and the pending digest image 9C (the pending icon 9C) is not displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the hold icon 9A may be in a specific state in which it has changed in a specific manner, or in a normal state in which it has not changed in a specific manner. , as shown in FIG. 128(F), in the first effect, a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed, and among the plurality of pending icons 9A, the first displayed pending icon 9A is in a specific state, As shown in FIG. 128(G), when the hold icon 9A in the specific state moves to a predetermined position and becomes a hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C), as shown in FIG. 128(H), a plurality of hold Of the icons 9C, the suspended icon 9C is displayed overlapping part of the second displayed suspended icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128(B), in the second effect, a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed. is in a normal state, and as shown in FIG. 128(C), after the normal state hold icon 9A moves toward a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 128(D), from the display screen 7a disappear. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the first effect, when the first displayed hold icon 9A among the plurality of hold icons 9A becomes the specific state, the hold icon 9A in the specific state is displayed. A first image CM is displayed adjacent to , and a portion of the first image CM covers a portion of the second displayed pending icon 9A among the plurality of pending icons 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128(F), in the first effect, a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed side by side in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIG. 128(G) , the first displayed pending icon 9A among the plurality of pending icons 9A moves rightward to become the relevant pending icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. The second displayed pending icon 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are arranged along the second direction and displayed partially overlapping each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128(E), when the normal state changes to the specific state, the hold icon 9A suggests that the state will change to the specific state before changing to the specific state. is displayed, and the suggestive image PM covers part of the other pending icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending icon superimposition effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
The pending icon superimposition effects A to D are assumed to be executed when the game state is normal. However, the pending icon superimposition effects A to D may be performed in a game state other than the normal state. For example, the above pending icon superimposition effects A to D may be performed at the time of probability variation or at the time of non-probability variation.
[Modification 2]
In the pending icon superimposition effects A to D described above, the suggestive image PM is displayed before the pending icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state. However, the suggestive image PM may be displayed before the pending icon 9A changes from the specific state to the specific state that is advantageous to the player.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
one of the plurality of types of images is the pending icon corresponding to the pending,
a first effect in which the suspension icon is displayed overlapping a part of the suspension icon;
A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the pending icon is displayed and the pending icon is not displayed.
◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The pending icon may be in a specific state in which it has changed in a specific manner, or in a normal state in which it has not changed in a specific manner,
In the first effect, a plurality of the suspended icons are displayed, among the plurality of suspended icons, the first displayed suspended icon is in the specific state, and the suspended icon in the specific state is at a predetermined position. to the on-hold icon, the on-hold icon is displayed overlapping a part of the second-displayed on-hold icon among the plurality of on-hold icons,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
In the second effect, a plurality of the suspended icons are displayed, and among the plurality of suspended icons, the first displayed suspended icon is in the normal state, and the suspended icon in the normal state is in the predetermined state. A gaming machine characterized by disappearing from the display means after moving toward a position.
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2 or aspect D2-3,
In the first effect, when the first displayed suspended icon among the plurality of suspended icons enters the specific state, a specific image is displayed adjacent to the suspended icon in the specific state, and the specific image is displayed. covers a portion of the second displayed pending icon among the plurality of pending icons.
◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-4,
In the first effect, a plurality of the suspended icons are displayed side by side along a first direction, and among the plurality of suspended icons, the first displayed suspended icon moves in the second direction. The pending icon that becomes the pending icon and is displayed second among the plurality of pending icons and the pending icon are arranged along the second direction and are partially overlapped and displayed. Characteristic game machine.
◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-5,
When the suspension icon changes from the normal state to the specific state, a suggestive image suggesting the change to the specific state is displayed before changing to the specific state. A game machine characterized by covering a part of an icon.

The pending special display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. FIG. This pending special display effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending special display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Holding special display effect]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the pending display pattern 1 and the pending display pattern 2 of the pending special display effects.
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the pending display pattern 3 and the pending display pattern 4 of the pending special display effect.
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining suspension display pattern 5 and suspension display pattern 6 of the suspension special display effect.
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the pending display pattern 7 and the pending display pattern 8 of the pending special display effect.
This pending special display effect can be executed in a plurality of pending display patterns. The pending display patterns 1 to 8 will be described below. Suspended display patterns 1 to 8 are effects performed with the same variation from the start of variation of each special symbol (decorative symbol) to the stop display.

[Pending display pattern 1]
In the pending display pattern 1, first, as shown in FIG. 132(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, the pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and a pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as that of the fluctuation start effect and the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. In this ready-to-reach production 2, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-reach production 1 o'clock.
This pending display pattern 1 does not change the mode of pending display.

[Holding display pattern 2]
In the pending display pattern 2, first, as shown in FIG. 132(D), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, the pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(F), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. At least part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is different from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the positions of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are different from those of the ready-to-win effect 1 . Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B move from the lower left position to the upper right position on the display screen 7a and are arranged diagonally with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have the same shape, color, or pattern as the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. In this ready-to-win production 2, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-win production 1 o'clock.
This pending display pattern 2 is a mode in which the position changes among modes of pending display.

[Pending display pattern 3]
In the pending display pattern 3, first, as shown in FIG. 133(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, the pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. At least part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is different from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed in two places. One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as the reach effect 1 o'clock. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) compared to the ready-to-win effect time 1 . The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B, which are displayed at different locations compared to the ready-to-win effect 1, are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are oblique to the lower side of the display screen 7a. placed in The suspension icon 9A and the suspension icon 9C have the same shape, color, or pattern as the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. In this ready-to-reach production 3, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-reach production 1 o'clock.
In this hold display pattern 3, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in two places at the same time, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in one place are arranged at different positions in the hold display mode. It is a changing aspect.

[Holding display pattern 4]
In the pending display pattern 4, first, as shown in FIG. 133(D), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, the pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(F), ready-to-win effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and a pending icon 9C are displayed. At least part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is different from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are different in color and pattern from those of the ready-to-win effect 1, and have changed to a red cross-hatched pattern. In this ready-to-reach production 4, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-reach production 1 o'clock.
This reserved display pattern 4 is a form of reserved display in which colors and patterns change.

[Pending display pattern 5]
In the pending display pattern 5, first, as shown in FIG. 134(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, the pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. At least part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is different from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are different in shape from the ready-to-win effect 1, and have changed into a star shape. In this ready-to-win production 5, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-win production 1 o'clock.
This pending display pattern 5 is a state in which the shape changes among modes of pending display.

[Pending display pattern 6]
In pending display pattern 6, first, as shown in FIG. 134(D), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, the pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and the pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(F), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. At least part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is different from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as the reach effect 1 o'clock. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) compared to the ready-to-win effect time 1 . The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C displayed at the first place are different in color and pattern from those of the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock, and have changed to a red cross-hatched pattern. On the other hand, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B displayed in the second location are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The shape is different from 1 at the time of production, and has changed to a star shape. In this ready-to-reach production 6, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-reach production 1 o'clock.

In this hold display pattern 6, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in two places at the same time, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are different in color and It is a mode in which the pattern changes, and the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C displayed at the second place are modes in which the position and shape change among the pending display modes.

[Holding display pattern 7]
In the pending display pattern 7, first, as shown in FIG. 135(A), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, a pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and a pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is different from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are different in position, shape, color, and pattern compared to the ready-to-win effect 1 . . Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B move from the lower left position to the upper right position on the display screen 7a and are arranged diagonally with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are different in shape from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock, changing to a star shape, and different in color and pattern, changing to a red cross-hatched pattern. . In this ready-to-win production 7, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-win production 1 o'clock.
This reserved display pattern 7 is a form of reserved display in which the position, shape, color, and pattern change.

[Pending display pattern 8]
In the pending display pattern 8, first, as shown in FIG. 135(D), a variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable start effect, a pending icon 9A (circular, white, no pattern) and a pending icon 9C (circular, white, no pattern) are displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are arranged parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 1, a ready-to-win state is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the friend character CRA, the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is the same as at the time of the fluctuation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), reach effect 2 is executed. In this ready-to-win effect 2, a ready-to-win state is formed by decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an ally character CRA, a pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed. At least part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C is different from the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as the reach effect 1 o'clock. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) compared to the ready-to-win effect time 1 . The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C displayed at the first location are displayed in the same manner as the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock. On the other hand, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B displayed in the second location are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The shape is different from 1 at the time of production, and has changed to a star shape. In this ready-to-win production 8, the ally character CRA has transformed from the ready-to-win production 1 o'clock.
In this hold display pattern 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in two places at the same time, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place do not change in the hold display mode. , the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C displayed at the second location are modes of changing the position and shape of the pending display modes.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending special display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed as the hold display at the time of the ready-to-win effect 1 (hereinafter referred to as the ready-to-win effect 1 o'clock (also called pending display) and the pending display at the time of ready-to-win effect 2 (hereinafter also called pending display at ready-to-win effect 2) are performed. According to this configuration, since the ready-to-win effect 1 and the ready-to-win effect 2 have different pending display modes, the player's interest in the pending display can be aroused, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, and 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed at the first place in the ready-to-win effect 2, and at the second place The displayed pending icon 9A and the relevant pending icon 9C are displayed at the same time. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the pending display, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the pending display, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, 7, and 8, in the ready-to-win effect 1, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in the first place, and the ready-to-win In effect 2, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed at the second location. According to this configuration, the position of the pending display is different between the ready-to-win effect 1 and the ready-to-win effect 2, so that the player's interest in the pending display can be aroused and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 5 to 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a circular shape in the reach effect 1, and the hold icon 9C is displayed in the reach effect 2. The icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, the ready-to-win effect 1 and the ready-to-win effect 2 have different shapes of the pending display, so that the player's interest in the pending display can be aroused and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pending special display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold display patterns 2 to 8 may perform a chance-up effect using the hold icon 9A and/or the hold icon 9C of the ready-to-win effect 2. According to this configuration, since the pending display and the chance-up effect can be used together, an interesting effect can be provided without wasting the display screen 7a.
For example, in pending display pattern 2, a look-ahead effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and the look-ahead result may be displayed by changing the shape, color, and pattern of the pending display. In this case, for example, when the result of prefetching (preliminary determination) is a big hit, the color of the pending icon 9A to be prefetched is changed from white to red.
Further, in the pending display pattern 2, a look-ahead effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and a predetermined display showing the result of the look-ahead and the pending display may be displayed in association with each other. In this case, for example, when the result of the look-ahead (preliminary determination) is a big hit, the hold icon 9A to be looked-ahead may be associated with a timer display or a predetermined chance-up character (extra hot, etc.).

[Modification 2]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold display patterns 2 to 8 use the hold icon 9A and/or the hold icon 9C of the ready-to-win effect 2 to indicate the number of times of a predetermined effect. may be performed. According to this configuration, since the pending display and the effect indicating the number of times of effect can be used together, an interesting effect can be provided without wasting the display screen 7a.
For example, in the ready-to-win effect 2 of the pending display pattern 2, each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the color of one of the pending icons 9A at the second location may be changed to indicate the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect. In this case, when the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times, three icons of a color different from white (for example, red) and one white icon are displayed among the pending icons 9A. In this case, the suspension display may return to the original white color when the variation of the suspension display pattern 2 is completed.
It should be noted that the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 may be combined to perform the chance up effect and the effect number suggesting effect using the pending display.

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 1 to 8, in the ready-to-win effect 1 and/or the ready-to-win effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon An additional pending indication different from 9C may be provided. For example, in the ready-to-win production 1 and/or the ready-to-reach production 2, in addition to the holding icon 9A, a holding display represented by a number may be additionally provided. This added pending display represents the same pending number as the pending icon 9A. In this case, if the number of pending icons 9A is four (the number of pending is 4), the added pending display is represented as "4".
For example, in reach effect 1 and/or reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A, a hold display represented by a symbol may be additionally provided. This added pending display represents the same pending number as the pending icon 9A. In this case, if the number of pending icons 9A is four (the number of pending is 4), the added pending display is represented by a symbol representing "4".

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold display mode changes in the ready-to-win effect 2, but the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, All you have to do is change at least one of the patterns of the pending icon. Alternatively, the position of the pending icon, the shape of the pending icon, the color of the pending icon, and the pattern of the pending icon may be combined to change the mode of displaying the pending state.

[Modification 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2, 3, 6 to 8, the hold display moves to the upper left in the ready-to-win effect 2, but moves to the lower left, upper right, and center. may That is, when the pending display moves from the ready-to-win effect 1 state to the ready-to-win effect 2 state, it may be moved to a different position.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect for performing a first pending display form effect for displaying the display form of the pending display in the first form,
The second display effect is an effect for performing a second pending display mode effect for displaying the display mode of the pending display in a second mode different from the first mode,
A first pending display pattern may be selected as one of a plurality of display patterns for displaying the pending display,
A second pending display pattern may be selected as one of a plurality of display patterns for displaying the pending display,
In the same variation, when performing the pending display, one display pattern is selected from the plurality of display patterns and displayed,
The first pending display pattern is a pattern in which a first display effect is performed,
The second pending display pattern is a pattern in which the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
In the second pending display pattern, when the second display effect is performed, the first display effect may also be performed at the same time.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect 3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
said first form of pending display located at said first position;
wherein the second form of pending indication is located at a second location different from the first location;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3,
the first form of pending display has a first shape;
the second form of pending indication is a second shape different in shape from the first shape;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4,
In the second display effect, a chance-up effect using the hold display in the second form is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5,
In the second display effect, an effect indicating the number of times of effect indicating the number of times of a predetermined effect is performed using the pending display in the second form.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation means image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. This operating means image display effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the operation means image display effect is included, the corresponding image data and driving data are retrieved from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Operation Means Image Display Effect A]
136 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect A. FIG. The operation means image display effect A is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of probability variation. In the operation means image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 136(A), four button images BN1 to BN4, a meter image PL and a sword image VI are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 136(A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to see. The difficult-to-visually-visible aspect includes cases where the information is not displayed, displayed in a small size, and displayed thinly. The four button images BN1 to BN4 each represent the appearance of the effect button 63, and are displayed at respective vertices of the rectangular shape on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of the inner portion of a specific color. Here, "1300" is written at the bottom left of the meter image PL, indicating that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the inner specific color disappears. The sword image VI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, and is displayed semi-transparently here. As shown in FIG. 136B, these four button images BN1 to BN4 change to different colors at regular intervals to produce an effect that imitates the mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

When the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136(C), the upper right button image BN4 disappears and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the point number PN "150" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN "100". be done. Also, the sword image VI changes corresponding to the repetition of the depression operation of the effect button 63 . Here, the color changes to another color so as to represent the mode in which the inside of the sword image VI emits light.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the lower right button image BN3 disappears and the point number PN of "200" is displayed. . Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the point number PN "250" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN "200". be done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the lower left button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of "300" is displayed. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the point number PN of "330" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN of "300". be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears and the number of points PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation prompting image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, and here, the translucent sword image VI darkens to become the sword image ASI. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65 . A timer bar TBI indicates the period during which operation of the sword member 64 is accepted. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation prompting image OPI is an image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "Push!!!".

When the player performs the pushing operation of the sword member 64, the total points increase display effect shown in FIG. 136(H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the point number PN, the increment is stopped and the confirmation display TPD indicating the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total points. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, there is no remaining amount left. Therefore, here, after the final display TPD of the total points "1330" is displayed, the area of the portion of the inner specific color of the meter image PL is reduced and the remaining amount is reduced. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the characters "CLEAR!" are displayed in the achievement image ACV.

[Operation Means Image Display Effect B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining operation means image display effect B. FIG. The operation means image display effect B differs from the operation means image display effect A in the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation means image display effect B is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of probability variation. In the operation means image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 137(A), three button images BN1 to BN3 and a meter image PL are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 137(A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to see. The difficult-to-visually-visible aspect includes cases where the information is not displayed, displayed in a small size, and displayed thinly. The three button images BN1 to BN3 each represent the appearance of the effect button 63, and are displayed on the display screen 7a at the vertices of the triangle. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of the inner portion of a specific color. As shown in FIG. 137B, these three button images BN1 to BN3 change to different colors at regular intervals to produce an effect that imitates the mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

When the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137(C), first, the button image BN3 in the upper center disappears and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, as shown in FIG. 137(D), the point number PN of "150" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN of "100". be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137(E), the lower right button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of "200" is displayed. . Further, when the performance button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, the point number PN of "250" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN of "200". Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137(F), the lower left button image BN1 disappears and the point number PN of "300" is displayed. Further, when the performance button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, the point number PN of "330" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN of "300".

Then, as shown in FIG. 137G, a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation prompting image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64 . The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65 . A timer bar TBI indicates the period during which operation of the sword member 64 is accepted. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation prompting image OPI is an image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "Push!!!".

When the player performs the pushing operation of the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 137(H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137(I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the point number PN, the increment is stopped and the final display TPD indicating the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total points. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount of the meter image PL runs out. Therefore, after the final display TPD of the total points "1330" is displayed, the area of the inner portion of the specific color of the meter image PL is reduced and the remaining amount is reduced. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137(J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the achievement image ACV is displayed with characters "CLEAR!".

[Operation Means Image Display Effect C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect C. FIG. The operating means image display effect C differs from the operating means image display effect A in that an enlarged button image BBN is displayed instead of the sword image ASI in FIG. 138(G). The operating means image display effect C is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of variable probability. In the operation means image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 138(A), four button images BN1 to BN4 and a meter image PL are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 138(A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to see. The difficult-to-visually-visible aspect includes cases where the information is not displayed, displayed in a small size, and displayed thinly. The four button images BN1 to BN4 each represent the appearance of the effect button 63, and are displayed at respective vertices of the rectangular shape on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of the inner portion of a specific color. Here, "1300" is written at the bottom left of the meter image PL, indicating that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the inner specific color disappears. As shown in FIG. 138B, these four button images BN1 to BN4 change to different colors at regular intervals to produce an effect that imitates the mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

When the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138(C), the upper right button image BN4 disappears and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, as shown in FIG. 138(D), the point number PN "150" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN "100". be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the lower right button image BN3 disappears and the point number PN of "200" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 138(E). . Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, as shown in FIG. be done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138(F), the lower left button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of "300" is displayed. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, as shown in FIG. 138(F), the point number PN "330" is displayed overlapping the previously displayed point number PN "300". be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears and the number of points PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138G, an enlarged button image BBN, a timer bar TBI, and an operation prompting image OPI are displayed. The enlarged button image BBN represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and is larger than the button image BN. The enlarged button image BBN and the button image BN represent the same appearance of the effect button 63, but may have the same shape or different shapes. A timer bar TBI indicates an effective period for accepting an operation of the production button 63 . The timer bar TBI overlaps the enlarged button image BBN and is displayed in front of the enlarged button image BBN. The operation prompting image OPI is an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is displayed here as "Press!!!".

When the player performs the pushing operation of the sword member 64, the total points increase display effect shown in FIG. 138(H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138(I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the point number PN, the increment is stopped and the final display TPD indicating the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total points. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount of the meter image PL runs out. Therefore, after the final display TPD of the total points "1330" is displayed, the area of the inner portion of the specific color of the meter image PL is reduced and the remaining amount is reduced. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138(J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the achievement image ACV is displayed with characters "CLEAR!".

[Operation Means Image Display Effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect D. FIG. The operation means image display effect D differs from the operation means image display effect A in the order of increasing and decreasing the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation means image display effect D is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of variable probability. In the operation means image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 139(A), one button image BN1 and a meter image PL are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 139(A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to see. The difficult-to-visually-visible aspect includes cases where the information is not displayed, displayed in a small size, and displayed thinly. The button image BN1 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of the inner portion of a specific color. Here, "1300" is written at the bottom left of the meter image PL, indicating that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the inner specific color disappears. As shown in FIG. 139(B), the button image BN1 changes to another color at regular intervals to produce an effect simulating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light. When the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the point number PN of "100" is displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139(B).

When the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, a new button image BN2 is displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139(C). Also, the point number PN of "100" or "150" is displayed on the right side of the button image BN2. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, a button image BN3 is newly displayed on the right side of the button image BN2, as shown in FIG. 139(D). Also, the point number PN of "200" or "250" is displayed above the button image BN3. Further, when the performance button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, a button image BN4 is newly displayed below the button image BN3 as shown in FIG. 139(E).

Further, when the performance button 63 is repeatedly pressed down, the four button images BN1 to BN4 disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 139(F). Then, as shown in FIG. 139G, a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation prompting image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64 . The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65 . A timer bar TBI indicates the period during which operation of the sword member 64 is accepted. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation prompting image OPI is an image prompting the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "Push!!!".

When the player performs the pushing operation of the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 139(H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the confirmation display TPD indicating the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total points. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount of the meter image PL runs out. Therefore, after the final display TPD of the total points "1330" is displayed, the area of the inner portion of the specific color of the meter image PL is reduced and the remaining amount is reduced. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the achievement image ACV is displayed with characters "CLEAR!".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means image display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136(A) and 138(A), a first effect in which a plurality of button images BN1 to BN4 are displayed on the display screen 7a; C), as shown in FIG. 138(C), a second effect in which button images BN1 to BN3 are displayed in a number smaller than the number of button images BN1 to BN4 displayed in the first effect; (F) As shown in FIG. 138(F), a third effect is executed in which the number of button images BN1 that is smaller than the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect is displayed. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136(E) and 138(E), the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect is smaller than the number displayed in the third effect. A fourth effect can be executed in which button images BN1 and BN2 are displayed in a number larger than the number of button images BN1 displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138(G), after the fourth effect, an enlarged button image BBN representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and larger than the button image BN is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136(G), a sword image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 is displayed after the fourth effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. , the third effect is executed after the second effect, the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, the fourth effect is executed after the third effect, and the player The number of points is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63 by , and after the fourth effect, the total point is the sum of the points displayed in the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. A number TPD is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the meter image PL is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. , after the total number of points TPD is displayed, the meter image PL changes according to the total number of points TPD. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the operation means image display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means image display effects A to D described above, the button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63 . However, the button image BN may represent the appearance of the sword button 65 .
[Modification 2]
The operation means image display effects A to D are assumed to be executed when the game state changes probability. However, the operation means image display effects A to D may be performed in a game state other than the variable probability. For example, the operation means image display effects A to D described above may be performed in a normal time or in a non-probable time-saving time.
[Modification 3]
The operation means image display effects A to D described above are executed when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed down. However, the operation means image display effects A to D described above may be configured to proceed without the pressing operation of the effect button 63 . Further, even if the sword member 64 is not pushed, the total point increase display effect may be performed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
a first operating means operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first operation means image representing an appearance of the first operation means;
a first effect in which a plurality of first operation means images are displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which the number of the first operating means images displayed is smaller than the number of the first operating means images displayed in the first effect;
and a third effect in which the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect is smaller than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
The number of the first operating means images displayed in the second effect is smaller than the number of the first operating means images displayed in the third effect and the number of the first operating means images larger than the number of the first operating means images displayed in the third effect A game machine capable of executing a displayed fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is an enlarged first operation means image that represents the appearance of the first operation means and is larger than the first operation means image;
A gaming machine, wherein the enlarged first operation means image is displayed after the fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2 further comprises
A second operating means that can be operated by a player is provided,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second operation means image representing an appearance of the second operation means;
A gaming machine, wherein the second operation means image is displayed after the fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-2 to E1-4,
The second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the player's operation of the first operation means,
The third effect is executed after the second effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the player's operation of the first operation means,
The fourth effect is executed after the third effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the player's operation of the first operation means,
After the fourth effect, the total number of points, which is the sum of the points displayed in the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect, is displayed. game machine.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-5,
one of the plurality of types of images is a meter image;
The meter image is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect,
A gaming machine, wherein after the total points are displayed, the meter image changes according to the total points.

140 to 143 will be used to explain the effect during probability variation. This effect during probability variation can be executed when the gaming state is the probability variation state. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the production during the probability variation is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is reached, the variable probability state is continued until the next big win, so that the next big win is easier than in the normal state.

[Production during fixed change A]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during probability variation.
In the variable probability production A, the first ready-to-reach production and the second ready-to-reach production can be performed. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect will be described below. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are not performed with the same variations, but with different variations.

[First reach effect]
In the first ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 140(A), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(B), a target-hitting mission effect A is performed. In this target-hitting mission effect A, a target image E21 is displayed. This target image E21 represents a circular target, half of which is a region (variable suggesting region) suggesting a definite variable jackpot (V passing scheduled jackpot), and the remaining half region of the target is a normal jackpot ( V non-passing scheduled jackpot) is an area (also usually referred to as a suggested area). In the target-hitting mission effect, the target image E21 is rotated and the target is hit with an arrow as a mission.

After the target-hitting mission effect A, the following target-hitting success effect A and target-losing effect A can be executed. In the case of the probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of the variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), the hit success effect A is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), the target losing effect A is executed.

In the successful hit effect A, as shown in FIG. 140(C), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the variable probability suggesting area of the target image E21, and a effect is performed to suggest that the variable probability big hit is achieved. After this effect, a big hit game is performed, and then the probability variable state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target-losing effect A, as shown in FIG. 140(D), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the normal suggestive region of the target image E21, and an effect is performed to suggest a normal jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

After the target-hitting mission production A, the arrow always hits, and either the target-hit success production A or the target-missing production A is always carried out. That is, when the first ready-to-win effect is selected, either the variable probability big win or the normal big win is decided.

[Second reach effect]
In the second ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 140(E), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(F), a target-hitting mission effect B is performed. In this target-hitting mission effect B, a target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target is a region suggesting a probability variable jackpot (probability variable suggesting region), and the other half of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggesting region). Also called). In the target-hitting mission effect, the target image E21 is rotated and the target is hit with an arrow as a mission.

After the hit mission effect B, the hit success effect B and the hit loss effect B described below can be executed. In the case of the probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of the variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit success effect B is executed. In the case of losing (no big win) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), target losing effect B is executed.

In the successful hit effect B, as shown in FIG. 140(G), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the variable probability suggesting area of the target image E22, which is a effect suggesting that the variable probability big hit is achieved. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then the variable probability state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target losing effect B, as shown in FIG. 140(H), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the losing region of the target image E22, and an effect is performed to suggest that the game is not a big hit but a losing one. After this production, the variation of the special design (decorative design) is started again.

After the target-hitting mission production B, the arrow always hits, and either the target-hitting success production B or the target-missing production BNP is performed. In other words, when the second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is determined that the probability variable jackpot will always occur in the event of a jackpot. In other words, when this second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is either a probability variable jackpot or a loss.

[Probability during production B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining effect B during probability variation.
In the variable probability production B, the first ready-to-reach production and the second ready-to-reach production can be performed. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect will be described below. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are not performed with the same variations, but with different variations.

[First reach effect]
In the first ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 141(A), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(B), a battle effect is performed. In this battle presentation, a presentation of a battle (fighting) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is performed.

After the battle production, the following battle victory production and battle defeat production can be executed. In the case of a probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of variation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 141(C), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, and a victory suggesting image E23 and a definite probability suggesting image E24 are displayed. The victory suggesting image E23 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has won over the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a variable probability big win. Further, the variable probability suggesting image E24 is an image suggesting a variable probability jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then the variable probability state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 141(D), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, and a defeat suggestive image E25 and a normal suggestive image E26 are displayed. The defeat suggesting image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot). Also, the normal suggestive image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (unprobable variable jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

After the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always carried out. That is, when the first ready-to-win effect is selected, either the variable probability big win or the normal big win is decided.

[Second reach effect]
In the second ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 141(E), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), a hit-the-target mission presentation is performed. In this target-hitting mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target is a region suggesting a probability variable jackpot (probability variable suggesting region), and the other half of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggesting region). Also called). In the target-hitting mission effect, the target image E21 is rotated and the target is hit with an arrow as a mission.

After the target-hitting mission effect, the following target-hitting success effect and target-losing effect can be executed. In the case of the probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of the variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), a hit success effect is executed. In the case of losing (no big win) (FIG. 11: in the case of variation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), a target losing effect is executed.

In the successful hitting effect, as shown in FIG. 141(G), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the probability variable suggesting region of the target image E22, which is a effect suggesting a probability variable big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then the variable probability state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target losing effect, as shown in FIG. 141(H), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the losing region of the target image E22, suggesting that the game is not a big hit but a losing one. After this production, the variation of the special design (decorative design) is also started.

After the target-hitting mission production, the arrow always hits, and either the target-hitting success production or the target-losing production is performed. In other words, when the second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is determined that the probability variable jackpot will always occur in the event of a jackpot. In other words, when this second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is either a probability variable jackpot or a loss.

[During constant production C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the effect C during probability variation.
In the variable probability production C, the first ready-to-reach production and the second ready-to-reach production can be performed. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect will be described below. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are not performed with the same variations, but with different variations.

[First reach performance]
In the first ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 142(A), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(B), battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle presentation 1, a presentation of a battle (fighting) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(C), battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and a meter image E27 is displayed. This meter image E27 represents the hit points (life points) of the enemy character CRB, and the lower the meter value, the more advantageous it is to the ally character CRA. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the teammate character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (once or more), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Naturally, when the damage is large, the range of decrease in the meter value of the meter image E27 is large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the friendly character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the friendly character CRA loses.

After the battle production 2, the following battle victory production and battle defeat production can be executed. In the case of a probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of variation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 142(C), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, and an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, and a victory suggesting image E23 and a probability-variable suggesting image E24 are performed. is displayed. The victory suggesting image E23 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has won over the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a variable probability big win. Further, the variable probability suggesting image E24 is an image suggesting a variable probability jackpot. After this effect, a big hit game is performed, and then the probability variable state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the battle defeat production, as shown in FIG. 142(D), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and the friendly character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. An image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggesting image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot). Also, the normal suggestive image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (unprobable variable jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

After the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always carried out. That is, when the first ready-to-win effect is selected, either the variable probability big win or the normal big win is decided.

[Second reach effect]
In the second ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 142(E), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(F), a hit-the-target mission presentation is performed. In this target-hitting mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target is a region suggesting a probability variable jackpot (probability variable suggesting region), and the other half of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggesting region). Also called). In the target-hitting mission effect, the target image E21 is rotated and the target is hit with an arrow as a mission.

After the target-hitting mission effect, the following target-hitting success effect and target-losing effect can be executed. In the case of the probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of the variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), a hit success effect is executed. In the case of losing (no big win) (FIG. 11: in the case of variation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), a target losing effect is executed.

In the successful hit effect, as shown in FIG. 142(G), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the probability variable suggesting area of the target image E22, which is a effect suggesting a probability variable big hit. After this effect, a big hit game is performed, and then the probability variable state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target losing effect, as shown in FIG. 142(H), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the losing region of the target image E22, and an effect is performed to suggest that the game is not a big win but a losing one. After this production, the variation of the special design (decorative design) is also started.

In addition, after the target hitting mission production, the arrow is always hit, and either the target hitting success production or the target losing production is performed. That is, when the second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is determined that the probability variable jackpot will always occur in the event of a jackpot. In other words, when this second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is either a probability variable jackpot or a loss.

[During constant production D]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the effect D during probability variation.
In the variable probability production D, a first ready-to-reach production and a second ready-to-reach production can be performed. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect will be described below. The first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect are not performed with the same variations, but with different variations.

[First reach effect]
In the first ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle presentation 1, a presentation of a battle (fighting) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle presentation 2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and a meter image E27 and an ally entry icon E28 are displayed. This meter image E27 represents the hit points (life points) of the enemy character CRB, and the lower the meter value, the more advantageous it is to the ally character CRA. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the teammate character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (once or more), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Naturally, when the damage is large, the range of decrease in the meter value of the meter image E27 is large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the friendly character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the friendly character CRA loses.

The ally entry icon E28 is an icon that suggests that a predetermined ally character will participate in the battle production. A character is displayed on the ally participation in the war icon E28, and the character participates in the war. In addition, one character out of a plurality of characters is displayed in the ally participation in the war icon E28. These characters have a ranking of strength. If there is an ally participation icon E28 corresponding to a character with a high order of strength, it becomes easier to lower the meter value of the meter image E27 when the character participates in the battle. In addition, as the number of allied war icons E28 increases, the number of characters participating in the war increases, which increases the attack chances and makes it easier to lower the meter value of the meter image E27. That is, the larger the number of allied entry icon E28 and the higher the order of strength of the character corresponding to the allied entry icon E28, the easier it is to lower the meter value of the meter image E27, and the easier it is to defeat the enemy character CRB. . As a result, it becomes easy to become a definite variable jackpot.

After the battle production 2, the following battle victory production and battle defeat production can be executed. In the case of a probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of variation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 143(D), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, and an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, a victory suggesting image E23 and a probability-variable suggesting image E24. is displayed. The victory suggesting image E23 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has won over the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a variable probability big win. Further, the variable probability suggesting image E24 is an image suggesting a variable probability jackpot. After this effect, a big hit game is performed, and then the probability variable state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the battle defeat production, as shown in FIG. 143(E), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and the friendly character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. An image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggesting image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot). Also, the normal suggestive image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (unprobable variable jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

After the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always carried out. That is, when the first ready-to-win effect is selected, either the variable probability big win or the normal big win is decided.

[Second reach effect]
In the second ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect, first, as shown in FIG. 143(E), the variable start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(F), a hit-the-target mission presentation is performed. In this target-hitting mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target is a region suggesting a probability variable jackpot (probability variable suggesting region), and the other half of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggesting region). Also called). In the target-hitting mission effect, the target image E21 is rotated and the target is hit with an arrow as a mission.

After the target-hitting mission effect, the following target-hitting success effect and target-losing effect can be executed. In the case of the probability variable jackpot (for example, FIG. 11: in the case of the variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), a hit success effect is executed. In the case of losing (no big win) (FIG. 11: in the case of variation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), a target losing effect is executed.

In the successful hitting effect, as shown in FIG. 143(G), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the probability variable suggesting region of the target image E22, which is a effect suggesting a probability variable big hit. After this effect, a big hit game is performed, and then the probability variable state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target losing effect, as shown in FIG. 142(H), an effect is performed in which an arrow pierces the losing region of the target image E22, and an effect is performed to suggest that the game is not a big win but a losing one. After this production, the variation of the special design (decorative design) is also started.

In addition, after the target hitting mission production, the arrow is always hit, and either the target hitting success production or the target losing production is performed. That is, when the second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is determined that the probability variable jackpot will always occur in the event of a jackpot. In other words, when this second ready-to-win effect is selected, it is either a probability variable jackpot or a loss.

In the variable probability effects A to D, the first ready-to-win effect corresponds to the first display effect, and the second ready-to-win effect corresponds to the second display effect. In addition, in the variable probability productions B to D, the first ready-to-win production corresponds to the battle-type ready-to-win production, and the second ready-to-win production corresponds to the non-battle-type ready-to-win production.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect during the probability variation is shown.
[Effect 1]
When the first ready-to-win production is performed in the variable probability production A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the big hit is confirmed, the target hitting mission production A or the battle production is performed, and the hit success production A or the battle is performed. If the game shifts to the winning presentation, the probability variable big win (V passing scheduled big win) is confirmed, and after the big win game, the game shifts to a probability variable state (high probability high base state) relatively advantageous to the player. If the target mission production A or the battle production is performed, and the target loss production or the battle defeat production is performed, the normal jackpot (V non-passing scheduled jackpot) is confirmed and the time-saving state (low probability high) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game base state). On the other hand, when the second ready-to-win production is performed, the jackpot is not confirmed, but the hit mission production B or the target hit mission production is performed, and if it shifts to the hit hit success production B or the hit hit success production, the probability changes. After the big win (V-passing scheduled big win) is determined, the game shifts to a variable probability state (high probability high base state) which is relatively advantageous to the player after the big win game. If the target hitting mission production B or the target hitting mission production is performed and it shifts to the target losing production B or the target losing production, the normal jackpot (V non-passing scheduled jackpot) is confirmed, and after the jackpot game, a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state for the player ( Low definite height base state).
That is, when the first ready-to-win effect is performed, the big win is decided, and either the probability variable big win or the normal big win is made. When the second ready-to-win performance is performed, the big win is not decided, but in the case of the big win, the big win becomes a variable big win.
During the variable probability (during the high-probability-high base state), when performing the ready-to-win effect, one of the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect is selected.
According to this configuration, in the case of the first ready-to-win production, if the hit mission production or the battle production does not shift to the target hitting success production or the battle victory production, the normal jackpot is confirmed, so the game is played. When the first ready-to-win production is reached, the player watches the transition of the first ready-to-win production with great enthusiasm. On the other hand, in the case of the second ready-to-win production, even if the hit mission production B or the target hit mission production does not shift to the hit success production B or the hit success production, the normal jackpot can be avoided. Therefore, the player can elegantly watch the transition of the first ready-to-win effect with a feeling of ``if the second ready-to-win effect shifts to the successful hitting effect B or the successful hitting effect, it will be profitable. In this way, the first ready-to-reach effect and the second ready-to-reach effect cause a big difference in the player's state of mind, and when the ready-to-reach effect is performed during the probability variation, the first ready-to-reach effect and the second ready-to-reach effect are used. Since one of the effects is selected, it is possible to provide a sharp game effect during the probability variation. As a result, the player can enjoy a sharp performance during the probability variation, and can improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the variable-probability effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the first ready-to-reach effect, a battle effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA battle, and the second ready-to-reach effect is a battle-type reach. When a different hit mission effect is performed and the first ready-to-win effect is performed, the big win is confirmed, and if the ally character CRA wins, the probability variable big win is achieved, and after the big win game, the player enters a relatively advantageous variable probability state. If the game shifts and the ally character CRA loses, it usually becomes a big win, and after the big win game, the game shifts to a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state for the player. According to this configuration, if the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, the probability variable jackpot will be won, and if the ally character CRA loses, the normal jackpot will be won, so the support target can be narrowed down to the ally character CRA, and the battle performance can be enjoyed in an easy-to-understand manner. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the variable probability effects C to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the meter image E27 is displayed in the battle effect 2 of the first reach effect, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times. When the character CRA damages the enemy character CRB, the meter value of the meter image E27 is reduced. After the big hit, it shifts to the definite variable state. According to this configuration, by using the meter image E27, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the progress of winning or losing in the battle effect, and the player can be happy and sad about the battle effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the variable-probability productions A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second ready-to-reach production, a target-hitting mission production indicating whether or not the target-hitting mission is successful is executed, and the target-hitting mission is successful. Then, the jackpot is confirmed, and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to the variable probability state. According to this configuration, when the target-hitting mission is successful, the probability variable jackpot is confirmed, and even if the target-hitting mission is not successful, the jackpot is not usually achieved, so the target-hitting mission is performed with a sense of superiority. can be gracefully viewed as In addition, by using a mission-based presentation, it is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the probability variable jackpot or the loss. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the variable-probability production D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the battle production displays the participation of a predetermined character in the battle. According to this configuration, the more predetermined characters participate in the game, the more enthusiastic the player becomes, and the more interesting the battle presentation can be. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the variable-probability productions A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable-probability production is performed while the game state is in the variable-probability state. According to this configuration, it is possible to liven up the performance during the probability variation, which is likely to become monotonous because the next big win is likely to occur. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the effect during probability variation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the variable probability state, only the production during the variable probability (the first ready-to-win production and the second ready-to-win production) may be performed.

[Modification 2]
The production during probability variation (first reach production and second reach production) of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is not only when the probability variation state (during probability variation), but also in the normal state (low probability low base state), time saving state (low High probability base state), high probability low base state (latency probability variable state) may be performed. Further, the first ready-to-reach effect or the second ready-to-win effect of the variable probability effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment may be performed in a predetermined mode. This predetermined mode may be provided, for example, from after the jackpot game to a predetermined number of fluctuations. Further, the predetermined mode may be provided up to a predetermined number of times from the variation after the variation in which the super ready-to-win effect is missed. Furthermore, the predetermined mode may be provided as a look-ahead effect.

[Modification 3]
In the variable probability productions B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA battle in the battle production, but fellow characters may also battle each other.

[Modification 4]
In the variable probability effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the friendly entry icon E28 is displayed and the friendly character corresponding to the friendly entry icon E28 participates in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 tends to decrease. However, when the enemy entry icon is displayed and the enemy character corresponding to the enemy entry icon is weak, the attack chances of the ally characters increase in the battle, and the meter value of the meter image E27 may be easily lowered.

[Modification 5]
In the variable probability effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image E27 corresponds to the HP of the enemy character, but may correspond to the HP of the ally character. In this case, if the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, the friendly character wins, and if the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the friendly character loses. Also, the meter image E27 suggests that if the meter value decreases, it is advantageous in battle, but the meter image E27 may correspond to the attack energy that increases each time the ally character attacks. In this case, the more the meter value of the meter image E27 increases, the higher the winning probability of the teammate character.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
When the first display effect is performed, a big win is confirmed, and if a first condition is satisfied, the game is shifted to a first game state relatively advantageous to the player after the big win game based on the big win, If a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the player is shifted to a second game state that is relatively disadvantageous after the jackpot game based on the jackpot,
When the second display effect is performed, the big win is not determined, but in the case of the big win, the game state is shifted to the first game state after the big win game based on the big win,
When the ready-to-win effect is performed in a predetermined game mode, one of the first display effect and the second display effect is selected.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
the first display effect is a battle ready-to-win effect in which the first character and the second character battle;
The second display effect is a non-battle reach effect different from the battle reach effect,
When the first display effect is performed, a big win is confirmed, and if the first character wins, after the big win game based on the big win, a transition is made to a first game state relatively advantageous to the player, and If the first character loses, the game shifts to a second game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player after the big win game based on the big win.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
In the battle-type ready-to-win production, a meter is displayed, the meter value represented by the meter is reduced in a predetermined number of battles, and when the meter value decreases to a predetermined value, the first character wins, and the first game state is entered. to move to
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3,
In the non-battle-type ready-to-win production, a production representing whether or not a predetermined mission is successful is executed, and when the predetermined mission is successful, a big win is confirmed, and after the big win game based on the big win, the second Transition to the game state of 1,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-4,
In the battle-type ready-to-win production, a predetermined character is displayed to participate in the battle, and the greater the number of participating characters, the higher the probability that the first character will win.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-5,
The predetermined game mode is a mode representing that the game state is a variable probability state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The battle presentation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. FIG. This battle production is during the variable display of the decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"), especially the game state is a high probability state, time saving. It can be executed during state, power support (power support), and so on.

[Battle Production A]
144 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A. FIG.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 144(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, in this example, the game state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 144(A), above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters "Variable Probability" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 144(A). An image of a battle with CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement foretelling effect is executed. This battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement announcement performance suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are scheduled to be stopped when the friend character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot pattern array to be stopped becomes a probability variable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the variable probability state continues. As shown in FIG. 144(C), an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed near the ally character CRA. It is Also, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that these "777" are displayed in different sizes. A certain right "7" is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), on the display screen 7a, a battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the friend character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA is defeated, the jackpot pattern arrangement scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, the variable probability state falls to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 144(D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that this enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. It is Also, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The "888" are displayed in different sizes. A certain left "8" is displayed in the smallest size. By thus characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ. Further, the ally character CRA and the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ are displayed in a bilaterally symmetrical manner to impress the player with the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ. can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(E), the probability variable jackpot suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the characters "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA has won are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Victory!", the player can be made to think that "777" of the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ will result in a big winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), the probability variable jackpot fixed effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variable jackpot fixed effect, the variations of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It stops at "777" of , indicating that a probability variable jackpot has been hit. Above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "Probability variation jackpot!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the definite variable big win by this definite variable big win confirmation performance.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 144(E), as shown in FIG. 144(G), there is a case where a normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character "Lost!" indicating that the ally character CRA is defeated is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "Lost!", the player can be made to think that "888" of the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ will win the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(H), the normal jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot fixed effect, the variations in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. '888', which usually indicates a jackpot. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "Normal jackpot!" are displayed. A player is convinced of a normal big win by this normal big win confirmation performance.

In other words, in the battle presentation A shown in FIG. 144, the symbol array for winning and the symbol array for losing are displayed for advance notice during the battle presentation. Then, the game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during variable probability), the symbol array when winning is displayed with advance notice of the variable probability jackpot pattern array, and the symbol array when losing is the normal jackpot pattern array. A warning is displayed. That is, when the game shifts to the battle production, the big win is determined, and whether the confirmed big win is the variable probability big win or the normal big win is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, whether the variable probability state continues during the battle production or whether the variable probability state falls to the normal state is displayed for advance notice.

[Battle Production B]
145 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B. FIG.
In the battle production B, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), the decorative symbol variation production is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. Note that FIG. 145(A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of being changed (scrolled downward). In addition, in this example, the game state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 145(A), above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters "Variable Probability" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 145(A). An image of a battle with CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement foretelling effect is executed. This battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement announcement performance suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are scheduled to be stopped when the friend character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot pattern array to be stopped becomes a probability variable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the variable probability state continues. As shown in FIG. 145(C), an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed near the ally character CRA. It is Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ1, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that these "777" are displayed in different sizes. A certain right "7" is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ1 in this way, the player can be impressed with the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), on the display screen 7a, a battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement foretelling effect is executed. This battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the friend character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA is defeated, the jackpot pattern arrangement scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, the variable probability state falls to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 145(D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that this enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. It is Also, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The "888" are displayed in different sizes. A certain left "8" is displayed in the smallest size. By thus characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ. Further, the ally character CRA and the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ1 and the enemy character CRB and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ are displayed symmetrically to impress the player with the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ1 and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ. can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), the probability variable jackpot suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the characters "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA has won are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Victory!", the player can be made to think that "777" in the probability variable big winning pattern array AOZ1 will result in a high probability big winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(F), a variable probability 16R (round) jackpot finalization effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variable 16R jackpot confirmation effect, the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It stops at ``777'', indicating a 16-round definite variable jackpot. Above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, there are characters such as "Variable probability 16R jackpot!". With this variable 16R jackpot confirmation performance, the player is convinced of the variable jackpot in 16 rounds.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 145(C), as shown in FIG. 145(G), a battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement announcement performance suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are scheduled to be stopped when the friend character CRC wins as a result of the battle between the friend character CRC and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRC wins, the jackpot pattern array to be stopped becomes a probability variable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the variable probability state continues. As shown in FIG. 145(G), an ally character CRC is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRC has won is displayed near the ally character CRC. It is Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "555" is displayed as the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ2, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The "555" are displayed in different sizes. A certain right "5" is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ2 in this way, the player can be impressed with the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ2.
145(G) differs from the battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect shown in FIG. 145(C) in that the ally character CRA becomes the ally character CRC. and that "777" as the probability variable jackpot pattern array AOZ1 is "555" as the probability variable jackpot pattern array AOZ2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E) described above, the display screen 7a executes a variable-probability jackpot suggesting effect, indicating that the allied character CRC has won as a result of the battle between the allied character CRC and the enemy character CRB. A large character "Victory!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Victory!", the player can be made to think that "555" of the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ2 will result in a big winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(H), a probability variable 15R (round) jackpot finalization effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variable 15R jackpot confirmation production, the variations of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It stops at "555" as , indicating a 15-round definite variable jackpot. Above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the text "15R probability variation jackpot~!" is displayed. With this variable 15R jackpot confirmation performance, the player is convinced of the variable jackpot in 15 rounds.

That is, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, the symbol array for winning and the symbol array for losing are displayed for advance notice during the battle effect. Then, the game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during variable probability), the symbol array when winning is displayed with advance notice of the variable probability jackpot pattern array, and the symbol array when losing is the normal jackpot pattern array. A warning is displayed. That is, when the game shifts to the battle production, the big win is determined, and whether the confirmed big win is the variable probability big win or the normal big win is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, whether the variable probability state continues during the battle production or whether the variable probability state falls to the normal state is displayed for advance notice.
Furthermore, in the battle production B, there are a plurality of types of probability variable jackpot pattern arrays, and the probability variable jackpots of different numbers of rounds are set for the plurality of types of probability variable jackpot pattern arrays. Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of ally characters, and each of the plurality of types of ally characters is associated with one of a plurality of types of probability variable jackpot pattern arrays to be displayed for advance notice when the player wins in the battle effect. That is, the probability variable jackpot pattern array AOZ1 to be displayed for advance notice when the teammate character CRA shown in FIG. The probability variable jackpot pattern array AOZ2 to be displayed for advance notice when wins is the probability variable jackpot pattern array "555" for 15 rounds.
That is, in the battle production B shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of allied characters on the player's side who battle in the battle production, and depending on which allied character appears in the battle production, the player can decide what kind of character to win the battle. You can see the number of rounds for the probability variable jackpot. In other words, depending on which teammate character appears in the battle presentation, the player can estimate the number of balls to be released in the jackpot game when the battle is won.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C. FIG.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 146(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, in this example, the game state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 146(A), above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters "Variable Probability" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 146(A). An image of a battle with CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement foretelling effect is executed. This battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement announcement performance suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are scheduled to be stopped when the friend character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot pattern array to be stopped becomes a probability variable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the variable probability state continues. As shown in FIG. 146(C), an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed near the ally character CRA. It is Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that these "777" are displayed in different sizes. A certain right "7" is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), on the display screen 7a, a battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the friend character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA is defeated, the jackpot pattern arrangement scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, the variable probability state falls to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146(D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that this enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. It is Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are scheduled to be stopped. The "888" are displayed in different sizes. A certain left "8" is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ1 in this way, the player can be impressed by the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ. Furthermore, the ally character CRA and the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ1 are displayed symmetrically to impress the player with the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ1 and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ1. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(E), a normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character "Lost!" indicating that the ally character CRA is defeated is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "Lost!", the player can be made to think that "888" of the normal big win pattern array BOZ1 will win the normal big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(F), the promotion failure normal jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this promotion failure normal jackpot finalization production, the character screen of "Lost!" shown in FIG. Also, a promotion effect SKG is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. In this promotion effect SKG, a plurality of types of jackpot pattern arrays including a normal jackpot pattern array (for example, an even number of doubles) and a probability variable jackpot pattern array (for example, an odd number of doubles) are arranged in a display area surrounded by a square frame. A button effect is performed in which the player is made to repeatedly press buttons while the game is scrolled in the vertical direction. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the characters "Button repeated hits!" are displayed below the button image BOG. ing. As a result, the player can be impressed with the promotion effect SKG, and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the button (or after the lapse of a predetermined time if the player does not repeatedly hit the button), the scrolling multiple types of jackpot pattern arrays are stopped, and the normal jackpot pattern array or the variable jackpot pattern is stopped. Either pattern array is displayed. In the promotion failure normal jackpot finalization performance shown in FIG. 146(F), it is shown that "888" (normal jackpot pattern array BOZ1) is stopped as the normal jackpot pattern array, thereby promoting from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot. is suggested to have failed. As a result, "888" as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a continues to be displayed without being changed to the probability variable jackpot pattern array, and the normal jackpot pattern array "888" is displayed. In the upper part, the characters "promotion failure normal jackpot!" are newly displayed. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that promotion from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot has failed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146(G) instead of FIG. 146(D), a battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the friend character CRC loses as a result of the battle between the friend character CRC and the enemy character CRD. It is a performance. When the ally character CRC is defeated, the jackpot pattern arrangement scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, the variable probability state falls to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146(G), an enemy character CRD is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that this enemy character CRD has won is displayed near the enemy character CRD. It is Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "666" is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. These "666" are displayed in different sizes, with the right "6" on the side of the enemy character CRB being the largest, and the middle "6" being the second largest. A certain left "6" is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ2 in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ2. Further, the ally character CRA and the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ and the enemy character CRD and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ2 are displayed symmetrically to impress the player with the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ2. can be done.
146(G) differs from the battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect shown in FIG. 146(C) in that the enemy character CRB becomes the enemy character CRD. and that "888" as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ1 is "666" as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(H), promotion success probability variation jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this promotion success probability variable jackpot confirmation production, the character screen of "Lost!" shown in FIG. (not shown), and a promotion effect SKG is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. In this promotion effect SKG, a plurality of types of jackpot pattern arrays including a normal jackpot pattern array (for example, an even number of doubles) and a probability variable jackpot pattern array (for example, an odd number of doubles) are arranged in a display area surrounded by a square frame. A button effect is performed in which the player is made to repeatedly press buttons while the game is scrolled in the vertical direction. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the characters "Button repeated hits!" are displayed below the button image BOG. ing. As a result, the player can be impressed with the promotion effect SKG, and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the button (or after the lapse of a predetermined time if the player does not repeatedly hit the button), the scrolling multiple types of jackpot pattern arrays are stopped, and the normal jackpot pattern array or the variable jackpot pattern is stopped. Either pattern array is displayed. 146(H) shows that "777" has stopped as the probability variable jackpot symbol array, which suggests that promotion from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot has been successful. be. As a result, "666" as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a changes to the probability variable jackpot pattern array "777", and above the probability variable jackpot pattern array "777", "promotion Successful probability variation jackpot!" is newly displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the normal jackpot has been upgraded to the probability variable jackpot.

That is, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, the symbol array for winning and the symbol array for losing are displayed for advance notice during the battle effect. Then, the game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during variable probability), the symbol array when winning is displayed with advance notice of the variable probability jackpot pattern array, and the symbol array when losing is the normal jackpot pattern array. A warning is displayed. That is, when the game shifts to the battle production, the big win is determined, and whether the confirmed big win is the variable probability big win or the normal big win is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, whether the variable probability state continues during the battle production or whether the variable probability state falls to the normal state is displayed for advance notice.
Furthermore, in the battle production C, there are a plurality of types of normal jackpot pattern arrays, and normal jackpots with different promotion rates (promotion rates from normal jackpots to probability variable jackpots) are set for the plurality of types of normal jackpot pattern arrays. . Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters, and each of the plurality of types of enemy characters is associated with one of a plurality of types of normal jackpot pattern arrays to be displayed for advance notice when the player wins in the battle effect. In other words, the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ1 displayed for advance notice when the enemy character CRB shown in FIG. 146(D) wins is the normal jackpot pattern array "888", and the enemy character CRD shown in FIG. 146(G) wins. The normal jackpot pattern array BOZ2 to be displayed for advance notice is the normal jackpot pattern array "666". The promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot is set higher for "666" than for "888".
That is, in the battle presentation C shown in FIG. 146, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters that battle in the battle presentation. It is designed to estimate the promotion rate from normal jackpot to probability variable jackpot. In other words, depending on which enemy character appears in the battle presentation, the player can estimate the degree of expectation for a variable jackpot even when the ally character is defeated in the battle.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D. FIG.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 147(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L is displayed in the left design display area, the middle decorative design 8C is displayed in the middle design display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right design display area. is displayed. The order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped is such that the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped. In addition, FIG. 147(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating (scrolling downward). In addition, in this example, the game state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 147(A), above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters "Variable Probability" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 147(A). An image of a battle with CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement foretelling effect is executed. This battle victory jackpot pattern arrangement announcement performance suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are scheduled to be stopped when the friend character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot pattern array to be stopped becomes a probability variable jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the variable probability state continues. As shown in FIG. 147(C), an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed near the ally character CRA. It is Also, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probability variable jackpot symbol array AOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that these "777" are displayed in different sizes. A certain right "7" is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the variable probability big winning symbol array AOZ.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), on the display screen 7a, a battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect is executed. This battle defeat jackpot pattern arrangement announcement effect suggests a jackpot pattern arrangement in which the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the friend character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a performance. When the ally character CRA is defeated, the jackpot pattern arrangement scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, the variable probability state falls to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 147(D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter "V" indicating that this enemy character CRB has won is displayed near the enemy character CRB. It is Also, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The "888" are displayed in different sizes. A certain left "8" is displayed in the smallest size. By thus characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ. Further, the ally character CRA and the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ are displayed in a bilaterally symmetrical manner to impress the player with the variable probability big winning pattern array AOZ and the normal big winning pattern array BOZ. can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(E), a normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character "Lost!" indicating that the ally character CRA is defeated is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "Lost!", the player can be made to think that "888" of the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ will win the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), the normal jackpot confirmed fake effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot confirmation fake effect, the variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. This is an effect to make the player think that "888" as the jackpot pattern array BOZ has stopped, as if a normal jackpot had been won. However, in the normal jackpot finalized fake effect shown in FIG. 147(F), "888" as the normal jackpot pattern array BOZ is not completely stopped, and is slightly swayed up and down (2 or 3 frames). It has become. Above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "Normal jackpot!" are displayed. In other words, the player has the illusion that the normal big win is confirmed by this normal big win confirmation fake effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), a battle revival probability variable jackpot suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Although detailed illustration is omitted, this battle revival probability variable jackpot suggestion production is the normal jackpot fixed fake production shown in FIG. The battle effect shown in FIG. 147(B) is executed in which the ally character CRA, which was once defeated, is revived and battles the enemy character CRB again. Then, in this re-executed battle production, the allied character CRA wins this time, and as a result, the center of the display screen 7a shows that the allied character CRA has won, as shown in FIG. The characters "Resurrection Victory!" are displayed in large letters. By displaying the characters "Resurrection Victory!", the player can be made to think that "777" in the probability variable big winning pattern array AOZ1 will result in a high probability big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(H), the probability variable jackpot fixed effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variable jackpot confirmation production, the screen of "Resurrection Victory!", Which was displayed in the battle revival probability variable jackpot suggestion production shown in FIG. It is displayed in 7a and indicates that the probability variable jackpot has been won. Above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "Probability variation jackpot!" are displayed. The player is convinced of the definite variable big win by this definite variable big win confirmation performance.

In other words, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, the symbol array when winning and the symbol array when losing are displayed in advance during the battle effect. Then, the game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during variable probability), the symbol array when winning is displayed with advance notice of the variable probability jackpot pattern array, and the symbol array when losing is the normal jackpot pattern array. A warning is displayed. That is, when the game shifts to the battle production, the big win is determined, and whether the confirmed big win is the variable probability big win or the normal big win is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, whether the variable probability state continues during the battle production or whether the variable probability state falls to the normal state is displayed for advance notice.
Furthermore, in the battle production D, the player's ally character is once defeated in the battle production, and after making the player think that the player will get a normal jackpot and fall from the probability variable state to the normal state, the ally character is revived and again. A battle effect is performed, and then a revival effect in which the ally character wins is performed. As a result, the player who has been made to think that the variable probability state will fall to the normal state due to the normal jackpot can be made to think that the variable probability state will continue after the variable probability big win. That is, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, once the normal jackpot pattern array that has been previewed is displayed as a fake, then the effect that the variable jackpot pattern array that has been previewed is confirmed is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the battle production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is capable of executing a battle effect in which a friendly character on the player side and an enemy character fight against each other. During the performance of the battle, the stop pattern array in the predetermined variation of the decorative pattern when the ally character wins and the stop pattern array in the predetermined variation of the decorative pattern when the ally character is defeated are displayed for advance notice. ing. According to this configuration, the player can estimate the benefit that is advantageous to the player when the ally character wins and the penalty that is disadvantageous to the player when the ally character loses. Become. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, the stop pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns when the teammate character wins is the probability variable jackpot pattern arrangement. According to this configuration, when the player's teammate character wins, the player knows that the game will be a big win, and after the big win, the game state shifts to a high-probability state, or the high-probability state continues. It becomes clear to do. As a result, the player can approach the game with high expectations, and as a result, the game can be more interesting.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the variable probability jackpot pattern array is configured such that the number of jackpot rounds differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the number of rounds of the probability variable jackpot when the teammate character wins the battle. That is, the player can estimate the number of balls to be released in the jackpot game when the teammate character wins the battle. As a result, the player can approach the game with high expectations when a variable jackpot pattern array with a large number of rounds (large number of balls to be played) is announced and displayed in the battle production. can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, the stop pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns when the teammate character is defeated is the normal jackpot pattern arrangement. According to this configuration, when the player's teammate character is defeated, the player can understand that the game will be a big win, and after the big win, the game state is maintained in the normal state or the time-saving state, or changed from the probability variable state to the normal state. And it will be understood that it will shift to a time saving state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the future development of the game, and can play an appropriate game for the future development of the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the normal jackpot pattern arrangement is configured such that the promotion rate to the probability variable jackpot differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot when the teammate character is defeated in the battle. In other words, even when the teammate character loses the battle, the player can estimate the degree of expectation that the normal jackpot will be promoted to the probability variable jackpot. As a result, even when the player's ally character is defeated in the battle, the player can approach the game with high expectations when the normal jackpot pattern arrangement with a high promotion rate to the probability variable jackpot is announced and displayed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the battle production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the image display device 7 is composed of one display screen 7a. Although the arrangement and the pattern arrangement at the time of defeat are displayed on the plane, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the back side, and the pattern arrangement to be displayed for notice is displayed on the first display screen. can be By doing so, the symbol array to be displayed for notice is displayed closer to the player, and can be strongly appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. The image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, the 3D display of the previously announced pattern arrangement can appeal to the player.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, during the battle production, the probability variable jackpot pattern array when the teammate character wins and the normal jackpot pattern array when the teammate character is defeated are displayed for advance notice. However, the display timing of these foretold symbol arrays is not particularly limited. For example, after displaying the probability variable jackpot pattern array (normal jackpot pattern array), the normal jackpot pattern array (probability variable jackpot pattern array) may be displayed continuously, or may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, a battle effect is performed when the game state is in a high probability state (during variable probability), and the pattern arrangement when the ally character wins and the symbol arrangement when defeated , but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a battle effect may be performed in the time-saving state or the normal state where the game state is a low-probability state, and the symbol array when the ally character wins and the symbol array when defeated may be displayed for advance notice. In this case, the pattern array when the ally character wins may be the jackpot pattern array (including the variable jackpot pattern array and the normal jackpot pattern array), and the pattern array when the ally character loses may be the losing pattern array. Alternatively, the pattern arrangement when the ally character wins is the probability variable jackpot pattern arrangement, and the pattern arrangement when the ally character loses is the normal jackpot pattern arrangement without shortening the working time, with a small number of balls (for example, a two-round jackpot). Alternatively, it may be a game with no number of balls (for example, 2 rounds with an extremely short opening time of the big prize opening, and substantially impossible to win a prize).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of probability variable jackpot pattern arrays when a teammate character wins. is set, but this is because there are multiple types of normal jackpot pattern arrays when an ally character is defeated, and these multiple types of normal jackpot pattern arrays each have a different number of rounds of normal jackpots. may be set. In this way, the player can know the number of normal jackpot rounds when the player loses the battle, and can estimate the number of balls to be released in the jackpot game when the battle is lost.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the battle effect is that a V attacker having a V area, commonly called a V-ST machine, is opened in a predetermined round of a jackpot game, and this opened By causing the V attacker to win the game ball and pass through the V area, the game state after the big hit becomes a high probability state (probability variable state) until the pattern variation is performed a predetermined number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the battle performance may be performed by a gaming machine, commonly called a loop machine, in which the game state is in a high probability state (variable probability state) until the next big win after the big win. In this way, when the ally character wins in the battle production and the probability variable jackpot is achieved in the predicted probability variable jackpot pattern arrangement, the high probability state (variable probability state) continues until the next jackpot. Furthermore, the amusement of the game can be improved. Alternatively, the battle production is commonly known as a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and when the pattern is matched by pattern fluctuations, there is a jackpot with no time reduction and a jackpot with time reduction. The time-saving state (electric sapo state) continues until the pattern change is performed, and when it hits the variable starter (special 2) in this time-saving state, the two types of attackers with the V area are opened, and the two types of attackers who are open The game may be performed in a game machine of two kinds of jackpots, in which a game ball wins a prize and passes through the V region, thereby saving time and making a jackpot. In this case, the battle production is performed in relation to the pattern variation for lottery of the first kind of jackpot, and when the ally character wins, the time-saving jackpot pattern array is displayed in advance, and when the ally character is defeated, the time-saving jackpot pattern array is announced. It should be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
a pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of patterns;
decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns according to the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is capable of executing, as one of the plurality of display effects, a battle effect in which a player's ally character and an enemy character fight each other,
The display means performs the battle effect in a predetermined variation of the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display means, and a stop pattern arrangement in the predetermined variation of the decorative pattern when the ally character wins during the battle effect; displaying an advance notice of a stop pattern arrangement in a predetermined variation of the decorative pattern when the friendly character is defeated;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-2]
In the battle production, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbols when the ally character wins is a probability variable jackpot symbol array,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-3]
The probability variable jackpot pattern array has a different number of jackpot rounds depending on its type,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-4]
In the battle production, the stop pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns when the ally character is defeated is a normal jackpot pattern arrangement,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, characterized by:
[Aspect E3-5]
The normal jackpot pattern array has a different promotion rate to the probability variable jackpot depending on its type,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-4, characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, among the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 . In this case, the display effects described above may be executed by the sub-display device.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (relevant pending icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 20 First start port 21 Second start port 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Effect control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a character effect may be performed to display a predetermined character that suggests development to a predetermined effect ,
In the character presentation, decorative patterns are stopped to form a ready-to-win state, and the decorative patterns forming the ready-to-win state and specific decorative patterns capable of forming a jackpot pattern array move at a first degree of transparency, and the ready-to-win state is formed. When a specific decorative design moves on the reach line in the state, the specific decorative design is displayed with a second transparency higher than the first transparency, and the specific decorative design is displayed at the second transparency. By displaying with a transparency of 2, the entire predetermined character, part of which is arranged behind the specific decorative pattern, is displayed so as to be visible,
The predetermined effect is performed by displaying the predetermined character in the character effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images